Registration Handbook 9.3

Banner Student Registration HandbookRelease 9.3August 2015/nWithout limitation: Ellucian®, Banner®, Coll eague®, and Luminis® are trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies that are reg istered in the U.S. and certain other countries; and Ellucian AdvanceŽ, Ellucian Course SignalsŽ, Ellucian Degree WorksŽ, Ellucian PowerCampus Ž, Ellucian RecruiterŽ, Ellucian SmartCallŽ, are also trademarks of the Ellucian group of companies. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. © 2015 Ellucian. Contains confidential and proprietary information of Ellucian and its subsidiaries. Use of these materials is limited to Elluci an licensees, and is subject to the terms and conditions of one or more written li cense agreements between Ellucian and the licensee in question. In preparing and providing this publicati on, Ellucian is not rendering legal, accounti ng, or other similar professional service s. Ellucian makes no claims that an institution's use of this publication or the soft ware for which it is provided will guarantee compliance with ap plicable federal or state laws, rules, or regulations. Each organiza tion should seek legal, accounting, and other similar professional services from comp etent providers of the organization's own choosing. Prepared by: Ellucian 4375 Fair Lakes Court Fairfax, Virginia 22033 United States of America Revision History Publication DateSummary August 2015New version that supports Banner Student Registration 9.3 software. /n 3Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Contents Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Administrative pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Registration pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Block registration pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Registration planning pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Projected registration forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Overall pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Search pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Reports and processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Self-Service pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Introductory pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Registration pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Quick Start Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Basic registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Block registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Registration planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Structured registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Projected registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Banner 9.x User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Banner Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Log in to Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Log out of Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 /n 4Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Navigate between 9.x modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Single Sign On with CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Page heading items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Keyword searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Stop words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Keyword default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Search on CRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Customize search options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Queries and commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Synchronize Class Search full text script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Examples of SQL Queries using Oracle Full Text Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Oracle Full Text Index maintenance SQL commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Search results for Browse Co urse Catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Search pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Search tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Autocomplete on ID and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Advanced filter on ID and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Name formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ID and Name Results window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Data masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Data masking and extended searches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 iCalendar File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Information text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Configure Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Update Information Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Registration pages with Information Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Setting 8.x Web Tailor globals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Customized message display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Application Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 /n 5Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Extensibility tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Configure Page Components Tool for ZK Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Domain Extension Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Registration Setup and Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Student Course Registration Page (SFAREGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Administrative pages and tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Configure search criteria and results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Review seed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Registration Configuration Table (SORWSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Overall Configurable Page Validat ion Table (STVWSPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Overall Configurable Page Field Validation Table (STVWSFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Set up registration models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Set up add and drop controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Permit-overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Bookstore links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Examples of link configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Configuration on SOAWSCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Email and print schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Using Personas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Persona types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Web Tailor role mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Determine persona assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Persona flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4Persona security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Faculty security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5Registration Landing page configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 ANONYMOUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 STUDENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 /n 6Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents FACULTY, ADVISOR, FACULTY AND ADVISOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 REGISTRAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Persona access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Name and ID search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Holds notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Prepare for Registration path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Register for Classes path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Holds rules and settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 SOAFACS rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Copy button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Block Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Set up and use block registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Pre-assignment limit control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Automated permit-override crea tion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Student characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Pre-assign blocks to student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Review incomplete registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Administrative pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Block Registration Control Page (SFABLCK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Student Block Selectio n Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Block registration in Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Block selection process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Permission to remove blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Permission to change blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Examples of dropped and added courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Enroll student in a new block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Remove student from an enrolled block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 /n 7Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Enroll student in a different block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Action field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Without restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Non-block only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Student Pre-Assignment Pr ocess (SFPSBPA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Incomplete Registra tion Report (SFRIBLR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Registration Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Plan Ahead path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Register for Classes path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Third party registration plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Faculty member and advisor plan access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Plan Ahead path and SEPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Register for Classes path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Faculty member or advisor created plans - Plan Ah ead path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Faculty security - Plan Ahead path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 PLANAHEAD rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 DISPLAYSCHEDULE rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 CHECKORDER rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Plans created by others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Using Add All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Open learning sections and plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Maximum number of plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Adding notes to a registration plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Study paths and plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Approved plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Preferred plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Study paths and preferred plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Personas and planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Plan access for the Registrar person a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Plan display order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Update plans created in release 9.0 CR1 as prefer red plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Planning path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00/n 8Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Set up Degree Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Set up registration planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Disable planning but allow students to register fr om third party plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Administrative pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 External API Information Validation Page (STVREST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 External API Connection Information Page (SOAREST). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Term Control Page (SOATERM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Self-Service Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Structured Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 CAPP overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Comparison of projected and structured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 CAPP data detail and display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Program, area, and group data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Tiered structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 SMAPROG general requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 SMAPROG program area attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 SMAAREA data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Area requirement types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Processing path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Set up structured registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Time-Ticketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 8Structured registration controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 GTVSDAX rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 AREASELECT rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 CLASS rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Rule summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Area name and selection of CAPP areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Area priority and selection of CAPP areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 All area requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Refine Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 4Structured Overview display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Use external API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Configure the external API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Use third party service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 /n 9Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Projected Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Comparison of projected and structured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Programs, areas, and compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Data used from compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Process summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Filter by maximum areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Filter by student class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Filter by first course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 8Mark course as most probable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Registration planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Processing path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Set up projected registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Projected registration controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 GTVSDAX rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 AREASELECT rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 CLASS rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 PRIADJFAC rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Use External API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Configure the external API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Use third party service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Administrative forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Projection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Projection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Schedule Planning Report (SFRPRES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Self-Service Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Setup information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Introductory pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Terms of Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 /n 10Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Security Question and Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Update Race and Ethnicity Su rvey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Forgot Password and Reset Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Forgot PIN and Security Question interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Registration pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Registration Landing Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Persona Selection page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Select a Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 55Name and ID Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Prepare for Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Update Student Term Da ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Class Search and Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Find Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Find Classes Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Find Classes Results - Linked Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Schedule information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Enter CRNs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Register for Classes path - administ rative view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Plans - Plan Ahead path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Plans - Register for Classes path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Register for Classes - Tuition and Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 9Projections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Structured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Schedule and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Registration Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Look up a Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Active Registrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Schedule by Centric Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Browse Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Basic Search Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Advanced Search Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Browse Classes Search Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Browse Courses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Basic Search Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Advanced Search Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Browse Courses Search Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 View Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 /n 11Banner Student Registration Handbook |Contents Set up Registration Self-Service pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Faculty Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Faculty Card data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Address, phone, and email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Faculty Card configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 20Faculty Card setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Registration Status tab setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Current student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Student status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Re-admittance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Holds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3Academic status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Study path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Hours earned by level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Permit overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Time tickets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Class code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Curriculum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Appendix - Extensibility in Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Configure Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Domain Extension Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Limitations of page customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 /n 12Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction IntroductionThis handbook contains information on Banner Student Registration 9.x. It includes information for the Banner Student Registration, Banner Student Overall, and Banner Student Self-Service applications. These ap plications provide processing for basic registration, block registration, registration pl anning, projected registration, and structured registration. ŁThe Banner Stud ent Registration application co ntains the SFXXXXX administrative pages used with registration processing. ŁThe Banner Stud ent Overall application contains the SOXXXXX, STVXXXX, and GUXXXXX administrative pages used with registrati on processing.ŁThe Banner Student Self-Service application contains the Self-Service pages and tabs used with registration processing. The registration and overall information is comb ined throughout this handbook for ease of setup and use. For example, SOATERM ha s specific setup requirements for basic registration, as well as for registration plan ning, structured registration, and projected registration. The chapters that contain the info rmation for each type of registration include the SOATERM page setup and the specific SFXXXXX page setup. You can also refer to the "Qui ck Start Information" chapter for simplified setup steps for the delivered types of registration processing. Go to the individual processing chapters for more detailed setup and use information for a spec ific type of registration, such as block registration. Self-Service page and tab information is contained in its own chapter with links and paths available from the Landing page. An appendix explains th e extensibility tools available with Banner Studen t Registration 9.x. The following chapters are in this book. ŁfiQuick Start Information fl on page18 ŁfiBanner 9.x User Interface fl on page25 ŁfiRegistration Setup and Use fl on page48 ŁfiBlock Registration fl on page72 ŁfiRegistration Planning fl on page85 ŁfiStructured Registration fl on page108 ŁfiProjected Registration fl on page131 ŁfiSelf-Service Registration fl on page150 ŁfiAppendix - Extensibility in Registration fl on page227 /n 13Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction Review the next section for lists of administ rative and Self-Service pages used for basic registration processing, block registration, registration planning, pr ojected registration, and structured registration. The administrati ve pages are summarized in the processing- specific chapters and detailed in the online help. Administrative pages The following Banner Student pages are used wit h Registration 9.x. Please refer to the Banner Student Registration Online Help 9.x for page and field details. Registration pages Important note for SFAREGS - Use the SFAREGS page in Banner 8.x for registration processing. An administrative registration display of course information exists in 9.x Student Self-Service. This registration view can be accessed and updated by users with the REGISTRAR persona, but it does not contain full processing functionality. The following Registration pages are used with basic registration. ŁRegistration Additional Fees Page (SFAEFEE) ŁEnrollment Status Control Page (SFAESTS) ŁRegistration Fees Min/Max Charge Control Page (SFAFMAX) ŁRegistration Minimum Maximum Hours Page (SFAMHRS) ŁRegistration Priority Control Page (SFARCTT) ŁStudent Course/Fee Assessment Query Page (SFAREGF) ŁRegistration Query Page (SFAREGQ) ŁRegistration Fee Assessment Refund by Total Rules Page (SFARFND) ŁStudent Registration Group Page (SFARGRP) ŁThird Party Registration Ti me Controls Page (SFARGTC) ŁRegistration Error Messages Page (SFARMSG) ŁRegistration Permit-Overrides Control Page (SFAROVR) ŁCourse Registration Status Page (SFARSTS) ŁReserved Seats Waitlist Priority Management Page (SFARWLP) ŁStudent Registration Permit-Override Page (SFASRPO) ŁStudent Course Registration Audit Page (SFASTCA) ŁTime Status Rules Page (SFATMST) /n 14Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction ŁStudent Withdrawal Page (SFAWDRL) ŁWaitlist Priority Man agement Page (SFAWLPR) ŁCross List Waitlist Priority Management Page (SFAXWLP) ŁStudent Registration Group Query Page (SFIRGRP) ŁStudent Withdrawal Query Page (SFIWDRL) ŁWaitlist Notification Error Query Page (SFIWLNE) ŁWaitlist Notification Query Page (SFIWLNT) ŁRegistration Section Query Page (SFQSECM) ŁRegistration Course Query Page (SFQSECT) Block registration pages The following pages are used with block registration. ŁBlock Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) ŁBlock Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) ŁPre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) ŁStudent Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) ŁStudent Block Selectio n Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) Registration planning pages The following Overall pages are us ed with registration planning. ŁExternal API Connection Information Page (SOAREST) ŁExternal API Information Validation Page (STVREST) Projected registration forms The following Banner Student 8.x forms are us ed with projected registration. They are delivered with Banner Student 8.7 and are detailed in the Banner Student Online Help 8.7 .ŁProjection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) ŁProjection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) /n 15Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction Overall pages The following Overall pages are used with Banner Student Registration. This list includes validation pages. ŁInformation Text Editor Page (GUAINFO) ŁAlternate Personal Identificat ion Number Page (SPAAPIN) ŁCurriculum Rules Control Page (SOACTRL) ŁHold Information Page (SOAHOLD) ŁOpen Learning Section Default Rules Page (SOAORUL) ŁPersona Rules Page (SOAPERS) ŁStudent Centric Period Term Control Page (SOASCPT) ŁTerm Control Page (SOATERM) ŁWeb Display List Customization Page (SOAWDSP) ŁOverall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) ŁWaitlist Automation Term Control Page (SOAWLTC) ŁPersona Validation Page (STVPERS) ŁCourse Registration Status Code Validation Page (STVRSTS) ŁOverall Configurable Page Field Validation Page (STVWSFD) ŁOverall Configurable Page Validation Page (STVWSPG) Search pages The following Overall pages are used as advanced filters for data searches. ŁPerson Search Page (SOAIDEN)ŁPerson Search Detail Page (SOAIDNS) ŁNon-Person Search Page (SOACOMP)ŁSSN/SIN Alternate ID Search Page (GUIALTI) ŁGeneral Search Page (GUISRCH) - Telephone, Email, Additional ID These pages are accessed as Advanced Filters from the ID field of pages that allow a search. The search can include person, person detail, non-person, alternate ID, additional ID, telephone, and email information. /n 16Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction Reports and processes The following reports and processes in Banner Student 8.x are used with registration processing. They are run through job submission. ŁStudent Block Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) ŁIncomplete Block Regist ration Report (SFRIBLR) ŁStudent Projection Process (SFPPROJ) ŁSchedule Planning Report (SFRPRES)\ Self-Service pages Self-Service pages are used by students, facu lty members, and advisors for registration processing. Here is a breakdown of the pages and tabs that can be accessed. Introductory pages The following Banner Self-Service pages are displayed after the user logs in, if the pages are set up to do so: ŁTerms of Usage page ŁSecurity Question and Answer page ŁUpdate Ethnicity an d Race Survey page ŁForgot PIN page Registration pages The following Banner Self-Service pages are available for use with registration processing. ŁRegistration Landing page ŁPersona Selection page ŁSelect a Term (with Name and ID Search) ŁPrepare for Registration, with associated tabs ŁRegistration Status ŁUpdate Student Term Data /n 17Banner Student Registration Handbook |Introduction ŁClass Search and Registration, with associated tabs ŁFind Classes ŁEnter CRNs ŁPlans ŁBlocks ŁProjections ŁStructured ŁSchedule and Options ŁRegister for Classes - Administrator View ŁView Registration Information, with associated tabs ŁLook up a Schedule ŁActive Registrations ŁSchedule by Centric Period ŁClass Search (Browse Classes) - without login ŁCourse Search (Browse Cour se Catalog) - without login /n 18Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information Quick Start Information This chapter discusses how to quickly set up and access the Banner Student 9.x registration functionality. More detailed inform ation is available in the specific processing chapters. Before any setup is performed, it is assumed that the technical installation of the applications has been completed, access URLs have been validated, and portal or single sign on setup has been done. Standard setup of controls on the Term Control Page (SOATERM) should also be completed, as is done for Banner Student 8.x registration. Additional registration setup is required to use Banner Student Registration 9.x for these processing areas. ŁfiBasic registration fl on page18 ŁfiBlock registration fl on page19 ŁfiRegistration planning fl on page20 ŁfiStructured registration fl on page21 ŁfiProjected registration fl on page23 Basic registrationDo the following to set up basic registrati on processing on the administrative pages. 1.In Banner 9.x, access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 1.1. Select the Term Management tab and go to the Registration Model section. 1.2. Set the indicators for the registration models you wish to use. 1.3. Set the add and drop indicators. These indicators are used in Banner 9.x in place of GTVSDAX rules used in Banner 8.x. Indicator Replaces GTVSDAX rule Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop check box CONDADDDRP Allow Student to Drop their Last Class check box WEBDROPLSTAuto Drop, Connected Course, Drop Errors radio group AUTODROP /n 19Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information 1.4. Save the changes. 2.In Banner 8.x, access the Progr am Requirements Page (SMAPROG). Verify that the registration model is defin ed for the program and term range, based on the registration model selections on SOATERM. 3.In Banner 9.x, access the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). 3.1. Customize the column display for the user interface. SOAWSCR replaces the SOATERM search and view controls for Catalog and Schedule. 3.2. Save the changes. Do the following to use registration. 1.Access Banner 9.x Self-Service Registration. 2.Select Register for Classes on the Landing page. 3.Log on as a student and begin the registration process. Additional setup and processing information is available in the "Registration Setup and Use" chapter and the "Self-Service Registration" chapter. Block registrationDo the following to set up block registration on the administrative pages. Note: You cannot mix the use of block scheduling in Banner 8.x and block registration in Banner 9.x. You must choose one or the other. 1.In Banner 8.x, access the Block Code Va lidation Page (STVBLCK) and define block codes.2.In Banner 9.x, access the Block Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) and build blocks of course sections. 3.In Banner 9.x, access the Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) and build rules to associate blocks with st udent characteristics. 4.In Banner 9.x, access the Pre-Assign ed Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) and activate block registration by term. Or, you may manually pre-assign a block to a student. Administration Drop Connected Course Errors radio group ADMINDROP Indicator Replaces GTVSDAX rule /n 20Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information 5.In Banner 9.x, access the Student Bl ock Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) and manually pre-assign a block to a student, so the student can select the block during registration. Or, you may pre-assign blocks to a student in batch. 6.In Banner 8.x, run the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) to pre-assign blocks to a student based on the SFABRDF rules. Do the following to use block registration. 1.Access Banner 9.x Self-Service Registration. 2.Select Register for Classes on the Landing page. 3.Log on as a student who matches the charac teristics of a pre-assigned block rule (SFAPABC) and begin the registration process. Additional setup and processing information is available in the "Block Registration" chapter and the "Self-Service Registration" chapter. Registration planningDo the following to set up registration planning on the administrative pages. 1.In Banner 9.x, access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 1.1. Select the Term Management tab and go to the Self-Service Options information. 1.2. Set the Term open for Self-Service Planning indicator to checked or Y.1.3. Set the Maximum plans for term field to the number of plans a student should be allowed to have for any given term. 1.4. Set the Display Self-Service plans in registration indicator to checked or Y.1.5. Set the Allow adding course sections to plan indicator to checked or Y, when the class schedule is available for the term. 1.6. Set the Check third party degree audit system plans indicator to checked or Y, when student SEPs from Degree Work s can be viewed in Banner 9.x registration. 1.7. Set the Display third party degree audit system plans in registration indicator to checked or Y, when student SEPs from Degree Works can be viewed in Banner 9.x registration and planning. 2.In Banner 9.x, access the External API Information Validation Page (STVREST). 2.1. Verify that codes used for registration planning and Degree Works (or other third party systems) exist. 3.In Banner 9.x, access the Extern al API Connection Page (SOAREST). 3.1. Set up the external API connection in formation if SEPs from Degree Works will be used with planning. /n 21Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information 4.In Banner 9.x, access the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). 4.1. Define the persona, page, and effective te rm field configurations for registration planning Do the following to use registration planing. 1.Access Banner 9.x Self-Service Registration. 2.Select Plan Ahead on the Landing page to build a plan for a student. 3.Log on as a student. 4.Select Register for Classes on the Landing page to access an existing plan for registration. 5.Log on as a student and select the Plans tab. Additional setup and processing information is available in the "Registration Planning" chapter and the "Self-Service Registration" chapter. Structured registration Do the following to set up structured re gistration on the administrative pages. Note: You must choose to use either stru ctured or projected registration. You cannot set up a mix of both types of processing. 1.In Banner 8.x, set up CAPP programs and areas.See the Banner Student CAPP Handbook for more information. 2.In Banner 8.x, access the Progr am Requirements Page (SMAPROG). Verify that the registration model is defined for the program and term range. 3.In Banner 8.x, set up rules for the REGPROJSTRUCT internal code group on the Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) to support the correct relationship between students and the CAPP program definitions. 3.1. For the AREASELECT internal code, enter P (Priority), N (Name), or A (All Areas) depending on how the CAPP programs were defined.3.2. For the CLASS internal code, create an entry for each classification code used for a correlation between the CAPP area definition a nd the student's classification. 4.In Banner 9.x, access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 4.1. Select the Term Management tab and go to the Registration Model section. ŒSelect the Structured indicator. 4.2. Select the Structured Registration tab and set the controls for Error Severity, Mandatory, Optional, Elective, External API, and Information Text. /n 22Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information Error SeverityŒSet the Error Severity radio group to Fatal, Warning , or None.Mandatory ŒCheck the Mandatory indicator when the student is expected to register for mandatory classes. Enter the Mandatory Rule Key when mandatory classes are defined under an area rule. The rule key is the name by which the mandatory classes are defined. If left blank, registration expect s mandatory classes to be defined at the top most level of the CAPP area. OptionalŒCheck the Optional Activ e indicator when the student is expected to register for optional classes. The Optional Rule Key is the name by which the optional classes are defined. It is required. ElectiveŒCheck the Elective Active indicator when the student is expected to register for elective classes. The Elective Rule Key is the name by which the elective classes are defined. It is required. External APIŒEnter the information for the External API value when CAPP is not in use. This will be blank for base Banner institutions. Information Text ŒDefine information text settings for print type. When additional text instructions ha ve been appended to a CAPP rule and should visible to the student, enter the print type to be used in the Structured Print Type field. When the rule text contains a URL that is to be displayed to the student, enter the print type to be used in the Links Print Type field. Do the following to use structured registration. 1.Access Banner 9.x Self-Service Registration. 2.Select Register for Classes on the Landing page. 3.Log on as a student and select the Structured tab. Additional setup and processing information is available in the "Structured Registration" chapter and the "Self-Service Registration" chapter. /n 23Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information Projected registrationDo the following to set up structured re gistration on the administrative pages. Note: You must choose to use either proj ected or structur ed registration. You cannot set up a mix of both types of processing. 1.In Banner 8.x, set up CAPP programs and areas.See the Banner Student CAPP Handbook for more information. 2.In Banner 8.x, access the Progr am Requirements Page (SMAPROG). Verify that the registration model is defined for the program and term range. 3.In Banner 8.x, access the Projection Configuration by Program Page (SFALPRO). 3.1. Create an entry for each CAPP program to be used in projecting what courses a student is to take. ŒEnter a number equivalent to no more than two years of areas in the Maximum Number of Areas to Project field.ŒSet the value of the Maximum Number of Areas Over Student Class field.Usually this would be 1.4.In Banner 8.x, set up rules for the REGPROJSTRUCT internal code group on the Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) to support the correct relationship between students and the CAPP program definitions. 4.1. For the AREASELECT internal code, enter P (Priority) or N (Name) depending on how the CAPP programs were defined. 4.2. For the CLASS internal code, create an entry for each classification code used for a correlation between the CAPP area definition a nd the student's classification. 4.3. For the PRIADJFAC internal code, set the valu e to an increment used in the CAPP area name or the priori ty assigned to an area. 5.In Banner 9.x, access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 5.1. Select the Term Management tab and go to the Registration Model section. ŒSelect the Projected indicator. 5.2. Select the Projected Registration tab and set the controls for Restrictions, Student Projection, Mandatory, Elective, and External API. RestrictionsŒCheck the Term open for Self-Service Projections indicator. ŒCheck the Restrict to Projected Courses indicator when the student is only allowed to register for courses in the projected list. /n 24Banner Student Registration Handbook |Quick Start Information ŒCheck the Restrict to Null Projections indicator when the Restrict to Projected Courses indicator is checked, and the student is required to have a projection. Student Projection ŒCheck the Include Failed Courses in Student Projections indicator to capture when a student fails a course, and the course is then added to the projected list. (This is helpful when compliance has been run assuming that students would pass their current classes.) ŒCheck the Mark Failed Courses as Most Probable indicator to forecast seat requirements for courses in the term. This does not impact registration processing. Mandatory ŒEnter the Mandatory Rule Key when courses that are required for students to complete their degrees have been entered into CAPP area rules, and you wish to have them designated as manda tory on the projected list. Courses found under rules with this rule key name are identified as mandatory for registration. ElectiveŒEnter the Elective Rule Key when courses that are optional for students to complete their degrees have been entered into C APP area rules, and you wish to have them designated as elective on the projected list. Courses found under rules with this rule key name ar e identified as elective for registration. External APIŒEnter the information for the External API value when CAPP is not in use. This will be blank for base Banner institutions. 6.In Banner 8.x, create compliance data for students using the CAPP SMARQCM form or the SMRBCMP batch process. 7.In Banner 8.x, run the Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) to produce the projected list output. 8.In Banner 8.x, view and maintain the pr ojected list by student on the Projection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ). Do the following to use projected registration. 1.Access Banner 9.x Self-Service Registration. 2.Select Register for Classes on the Landing page. 3.Log on as a student and select the Projections tab. Additional setup and processing information is available in the "Projected Registration" chapter and the "Self-Service Registration" chapter. /n 25Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Banner 9.x User InterfaceThis chapter descr ibes how to access an d become familiar with the Banner 9.x user interface. Banner Getting Started Guide Please refer to the Banner Getting Started Guide 9.x for information such as: Łobject naming conventions Łlogging in to the application Łuser interface details Łpage details Łkeyboard shortcuts Łfilters and queries ŁValue-Based Security (VBS) ŁSupplemental Data Engine (SDE) ŁMulti-Entity Processing (MEP) Łdata masking Łobject maintenance Łdata extract Łterminology usage from Banner 8.x to Banner 9.x Łtranslations Log in to RegistrationWhen you access Banner Student Registration Self-Service, you are taken directly to the Registration Landing page. You can select fr om various options. Unsecured options do not require you to log in to continue. Secured options require you to log in to continue. /n 26Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Log out of RegistrationWhen you exit out of Registration, always use the Sign Out button at the top of the page, and then exit out of the browser. This will comple tely close your session. The application uses cookies and caching, so if you do not sign out completely, the next person who uses that computer ma y be able to a ccess your records. Navigate between 9.x modulesWarning! When CAS is not enabled, you will need to log into the Banner Student modules separately. Single Sign On with CASPlease refer to the CAS Single Sign On Handbook for information on using CAS and the SSO Manager. Page heading itemsThe Registration pages contain the following items at the top. Some of the items can be accessed using keyboard shortcuts. ŁInstitution nameŁHome button (Ctrl+ Home) ŁBrowse pulldown (Alt + M) This item is not active for all browsers at this time. ŁTools menu (Alt + L) The Tools menu contains only the It em Properties option at this time. ŁUsername from login ŁSign Out button (Ctrl + Shift + Q) ŁNotification Center (number of notifications and messages) /n 27Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Keyword searchesIn the Banner Student Registration Self-Servi ce application, you can perform searches using keywords for the following parameters: ŁKeyword (With All Words) ŁKeyword (With Any Word) ŁKeyword - This option is used for partial words. ŁKeyword (Exact Phrase) ŁKeyword (Without The Word) OverviewThe following fields are considered during a keyword search against the Class Schedule: ŁSubject code ŁSubject description ŁClass title (Uses a hierarchy base d on SOATERM Web controls for Display Long Course Title and Display Long Section Title )ŁClass description (Uses a hierarchy ba sed on SOATERM Web controls for Display Long Course Description and Display Long Section Description )ŁDegree program attribute codes (SSADETL) ŁDegree program attribute descriptions ŁCourse number (such as 100) ŁSubject code plus course number (such as ART100) ŁCRNThe following fields are considered during a keyword search against the Course Catalog: ŁSubject code ŁSubject description ŁCourse title ŁCourse long title ŁCourse description ŁCourse textŁCourse number ŁSubject code plus course number /n 28Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface ŁDegree program attribute codes ŁDegree program attribute descriptions Special characters The use of special characters in search crit eria may affect the se arch results. You can only use the following specia l characters as delimiters. Ł, (comma)Ł. (period)Ł: (colon)Ł; (semi-colon)Use of the - (hyphen or dash) is not recomme nded, as it may cause a search to fail to execute. Characters such as , ^, ‚, !, @, $, #, &, ?, [, ], (. ), |, are stripped out. When you are searching on an instructor name, if the name entered contains an ‚ (apostrophe), no name will be retu rned. For example, if you enter O™Brien , the search will not return the name. If you enter OB or Brien , the name is returned. When you are searching on a course number, you can use % as a wildcard for your search. For example, if you search on CHEM4% , the results will return CHEM courses that start with the number 4.Note: The keyword searches for course and class are not case sensitive. When using the Not Any keyword for a Keyword (With Any Word) search, a positive keyword is also needed. For example, use the Not Any keyword to search for documents that contain one condition and not another. Here is another example. When performing a search for classes with the word ficulturalfl in any description or title but that do not have the word fihistoryfl in any description or title, you would enter the following.ŁKeyword: culturalŁKeyword (Without The Word): history Stop words Oracle does not consider stop words in a se arch. The list of stop words provided below has been defined for use in the Ellucian Oracle installation. The words may vary depending on the locale of the Oracle insta llation. The complete list of stop words can be found using the following query: SELECT spw_word FROM ctx_stopwords; Here are some of the stop words found using the query. /n 29Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Keyword default valuesThe following keyword searches are av ailable as the delivered defaults. MrMrs Msaall almost also although anand any are asat bebecause been both but bycan could ddiddo does either for fromhad has have having he her here hers himhishow however i ifininto isitits justllme might myno non nor not ofonone only onto orour ours should sshall shesinceso somestillsuch tthanthat thetheirthemthen there therefore thesethey thisthosethough through thusto toountil ve verywaswe werewhatwhenwhere whether whichwhilewho whosewhywill withwouldyet youyouryours /n 30Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface OptionSearchDescription Keyword (With All Words)StandardEnter all the words you want to find. The search uses AND logic. Sections returned contain all of the words entered. For example, if you enter History American , only classes with both fiHistoryfl and fiAmericanfl in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Latin American History, History of the American West, or American Cultures with a subject description of History. Keyword (With Any Word)AdvancedEnter any of the words you want to find. The search uses OR logic. Sections returned contain at least one of the words entered. For example, if you enter History , any classes with fiHistoryfl in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. If you enter History Math , any classes with fiHistoryfl or fiMathfl in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. KeywordStandardEnter partial words you want to find. The search returns sections that match the partial keywords entered. For example, if you enter intro ology , any classes with fiintrofl and fiologyfl in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Introduction to Sociology and Introduction to Cultural Anthropology. Keyword (Exact Phrase)AdvancedEnter the exact phrase you want to find. Sections returned contain the exact phrase entered. Do not use any special characters in the exact phrase. For example, if you enter Introduction to, any classes with that phrase are returned, such as Introduction to Accounti ng, Introduction to Math. /n 31Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Search on CRNThe keyword fields can also be used to qu ickly find sections fo r which you know the course reference number or CRN. Enter a know n CRN in the Any or All keyword fields to return that CRN in the search results. (Other sections may be displayed in the results as well, if they contain the same number in ano ther field that is checked by the keyword searching logic.) For example, if you are looking for CRN 101, an d you enter 101 in the Any or All keyword fields, you will find CRN 101, but courses will al so be returned for various subjects with the course number of 101. Once the search results are returned, you can use the sort functionality within the grid to locate the desired CRN more quickly. Customize search optionsKeyword searches are part of the basic and advanced search functions. You can customize the options in the basic and ad vanced searches by editing the display properties on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). ŁYou can reorder the fields, modify the field labels, and hide fields not used at your institution. ŁYou can also move fields from the basic s earch to the advanced search and from the advanced search to the basic search. ŁDo not use special charac ters in field labels. ŁDo not set a field to display multiple times. Keyword (Without The Word)AdvancedEnter the word you do not want to find. This option must be used with another Keyword search field, such as All, Any, Part ial, or Phrase. Sections returned contain the words entered in the Keyword (With Any Word) and Keyword (With All Words) fields but do not contain the word entered here. For example, if you enter History as any keyword and American as the word to exclude, the search returns sections with fiHistoryfl in any of the fields searched by keywords, but none of the sections returned includes fiAmericanfl. OptionSearchDescription /n 32Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Queries and commandsThe table changes, indexes, and database tr iggers used to support the Class Schedule and Course Catalog keyword searches were delivered with the Banner Student 8.6 release. The technical information is doc umented here, because only Banner Student Registration 9.x uses this functionality. This section contains information on index maintenance, SQL query patterns, and commands used with the keyword searches. When you are testing keywords, and an indica tor on SOATERM is changed, the section record or records to be found must also be changed and resaved in order for the keyword search to retrieve the desired records. Usually, settings on SOATERM are defined and left as they are. However, if during testing settings need to be turned on or off, you can run the drop script and the create index script for a particular index to refresh the records an d allow the keyword searches to pick up the correct records. These scripts may take a few minutes to execute. Synchronize Class Search full text script Using the SATURN ID, run the ssbsect_fti_sync.sql script to synchronize the index. The script is delivered with the baseline release as part of the PLUS directory. The contents of the script are: whenever sqlerror continue; Begin ctx_ddl.sync_index('ssbsect_ss_idx'); CTX_DDL.OPTIMIZE_INDEX('ssbsect_ss_idx','FULL'); end; / whenever sqlerror exit rollback; The Class Search full text index is delivered with a manual synchronization. Oracle provides synchronization upon commit, either ma nually or within an interval. The full text index on the SSBSECT table is delivered to syn chronize manually, so the registration process that updates enro llment counts on SSBSECT is not impacted. Each time a student registers for a clas s, the class enrollment coun ts are updated on SSBSECT. A second ssbsect_fti_sync_job.sql script is delivered with the baseline release in the PLUS directory. This script is used to schedule the synchr onization process. The default synchronization is each day at 3:00 AM. The default can be changed according to your site-specific synchroniza tion interval requirements. The Course Search full text index is scheduled to synchronize upon commit. The SCBCRSE table does not have frequent commit processing, and the synchronization will not delay registration processing. /n 33Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Examples of SQL Queries using Oracle Full Text Index Here are examples of how to query data using the full text index. Example 1Query rows for any value with fiHistoryfl, fiArtfl, fiManagementfl: Select * From ssbsect Where Ssbsect_Term_Code = '201410' And Contains(Ssbsect_keyword_index_Id, '(History OR Art OR Management)' ) > 0 ; Example 2Query rows for all values with fiHistoryfl, fiArtfl, fiManagementfl: Select * From ssbsect Where Ssbsect_Term_Code = '201410' And Contains(Ssbsect_keyword_index_Id, '(History AND Art AND Management)' ) > 0 ; Example 3Query rows that contain fiArtfl but do not contain fiHistoryfl: Select * From Ssbsect Where Ssbsect_Term_Code = '201410' And Contains(Ssbsect_keyword_index_Id, 'art~History' ) > 0 ; Example 4Query rows that have the partial value of fiHistfl: Select * From ssbsect Where Ssbsect_Term_Code = '201410' And Contains(Ssbsect_keyword_index_Id, '(%hist%)' ) > 0 ; Oracle Full Text Index maintenance SQL commandsThe following may only be used with an Oracle ID that has the necessary permissions to execute the CTSYS package. Describe the indexSet Long 10000 Select ctxsys.Ctx_Report.Describe_Index('saturn.SSBSECT_SS_IDX') From Dual; Find rows pending synchronizationSelect Pnd_Index_Name, count() From Ctxsys.Ctx_User_Pending GROUP BY Pnd_Index_Name; /n 34Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Synchronize all full text indexesThis script must be run by SATURN or the owner of the index. Declare Cursor Pending Is Select Pnd_Index_Name From Ctxsys.Ctx_User_Pending Group By Pnd_Index_Name; Pending_Index Varchar2(32); Begin Open Pending; Loop Fetch Pending Into Pending_Index; Exit When Pending%Notfound; ctx_ddl.sync_index(pending_index); Ctx_Ddl.Optimize_Index(pending_index,'FULL'); End Loop; Close Pending; commit; End; / Set up nightly synchronization jobThe following SQL must be run using SATURN an d is used to set up the nightly job to synchronize the SSBSECT full text index. This script is present in the ssbsect_fti_sync_job.sql script. Note that CTXSYS package may need to grant an execute on the CTX_DDL to SATURN. whenever sqlerror continue; DECLARE l_job NUMBER := 0; Begin DBMS_JOB.SUBMIT(l_job,'begin Ctxsys.ctx_ddl.sync_index(''ssbsect_ss_idx''); CTX_DDL.OPTIMIZE_INDEX(''ssbsect_ss_idx'',''FULL'');end ;' ,trunc(sysdate) + 3/24,'trunc(sysdate) + 3/24+ 1'); END; /commit; whenever sqlerror exit rollback; Find scheduled jobs and to remove a jobSELECT to_char(sysdate,'DD-MON-YYYY HH24:MI:SS' , job, what, next_date, next_sec FROM user_jobs; Execute Dbms_Job.Remove(job#); /n 35Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Search results for Browse Course Catalog When a search is performed for any of the keyword fields in Browse Course Catalog using the long course title, course description, c ourse text, and course attributes, the search returns results after searching across all effective terms for a specific subject and course number. Some searches will pass, and some will fail. For example, a course has a subject code of ACCT and a course number of 100. ŁThis course has a long title of fiIntroducti on to Accountingfl for the effective term of 201410. ŁThe course also has another long title of fiInt ermediate Accountingfl for the effective term of 201610. Here are some sample search scenarios using course long title. These examples also apply to searches on long course descrip tion, course text, an d course attributes. Note: Keyword searches do not take into account the Display Long Course Title and Display Long Course Description indicators in the Catalog Search Controls section of SOATERM. For the search term of 201310: ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiIntroduction to Ac countingfl will no t present any results. This sear ch scenario passes. ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiIntermediate Accountingfl will not present any results. This sear ch scenario passes. For the search term of 201510: ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiI ntroduction to Accountingfl will present the subject and course number ACCT 10 0. This search scenario passes. ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiI ntermediate Accounting fl will also present the subject and course number ACCT 100. Howeve r, this is not correct, and this search scenario fails. For the search term of 201710: ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiIntermediate Accoun tingfl will present the subject and course number ACCT 10 0. This search scenario passes. ŁThe keyword search on the long title of fiI ntroduction to Accounti ng will also present the subject and course number ACCT 100. Howeve r, this is not correct, and this search scenario fails. Subject Course NumberEffective TermLong Course Title ACCT100 201410 Introduction to Accounting ACCT100 201610 Intermediate Accounting /n 36Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Search pages Advanced filtering is available for searches on the following pages: ŁPerson Search Page (SOAIDEN)ŁPerson Search Detail Page (SOAIDNS) ŁNon-Person Search Page (SOACOMP)ŁSSN/SIN Alternate ID Search Page (GUIALTI) ŁGeneral Search Page (GUISRCH) - Telephone, Email, Additional ID ŁRegistration Section Query Page (SFQSECM) The SOAIDEN, SOAIDNS, SOACOMP, GUIALTI, and GUISRCH pages are filter pages used with specific data searches. Th e pages can be accessed from the ID fields on 9.x pages. The Registration Section Query Page (SFQSEC M) is a filter page used with section searches for registration. This page can be accessed from SFASRPO. These pages are documented in the Banner Student 9.x Online Help .Search tips Here are some tips on how to use the pe rson and non-person search functionality. Autocomplete on ID and nameWhen up to four characters are entered in the ID field or the Name field in Self-Service pages, the autocomplete function displays potential matches for the value entered. You can select a value to populate the ID field and Name fields. For the Name field, if a name or partial name is entered, the order of names returned is based on the matching order of last name, first name, middle name. Autocomplete display for ID and name can be used on pages that allow for advanced sear ches on persons and non-persons. The autocomplete feature can be optionally disabled for the ID and Name fields using the following rules on the Cross Walk Validation Page (GTVSDAX). External CodeInternal Code Internal Code Sequence NumberInternal Code GroupDescription YES, NOID_AUTO1 IDNAMESEARCHAutocomplete on ID field ONYES, NONAME_AUTO1 IDNAMESEARCHAutocomplete on Name field ON /n 37Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface ID_AUTO rule The ID_AUTO rule allows you to disable the autocomplete function in the ID field on Banner 9.x pages. This rule applies to all ID fields that have advanced ID and Name search capability. ŁWhen the External Code is NO for the rule, the autocomple te dropdown will not open as the user types characters into the ID field. ŁWhen the External Code is YES for the rule, th e autocomplete dropdown will open as the user types characters into the ID field, when multiple records exist that match the value entered. NAME_AUTO rule The NAME_AUTO rule allows you to disable th e autocomplete function in the Name field on Banner 9.x pages. This rule applies to all Name fields that have advanced ID and Name search capability. ŁWhen the External Code is NO for the rule, the autocomple te dropdown will not open as the user types characters into the Name field. ŁWhen the External Code is YES for the rule, th e autocomplete dropdown will open as the user types characters into the Name field, when multiple records exist that match the value entered. Advanced filter on ID and name You can use advanced filtering to query on IDs for persons and non-persons. Users must be granted access to the SSN_SEARCH special security object to view and use the SSN field for the advanced filter. The SSN field on the advanced filter is displaye d only if the user has permission for the SSN_SEARCH object and is not prevented by a masking rule from seeing the SSN/SIN/ TIN field in the ID and Name Results window. The SSN/SIN/TIN field in the window can have masking applied as described in the fiID and Name Results Windowfl section below. If a masking rule has been applied to the field in the Query Results section of the page, the user will also be prevented from searchi ng on this field in the advanced filter. OperatorsWhen performing a person search using the Equals operator for the Last Name and First Name fields, the results returned are only for an exact match to the data entered, including spaces and special characters. For example, if the Last Name equals Oleary , results would include Michelle Oleary but not Joseph O™Leary .Other operators for first and last names generate results that include names with spaces and special characters, regardless of whether those spaces and/or special characters have been entered for the search. This is the case with the Contains operator. For example, if the Last Name contains Oleary, results would include both Michelle Oleary and Joseph O™Leary ./n 38Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface You can enter a pattern of characters in the Last Name and/or First Name fields and use the Sounds Like operator. This helps when you are not certain of th e spelling of a name. As long as the first letter of the search string is corr ect, the results will return names with a similar pattern of characters. Sort orderPerson search results are displayed based on the following sort order: Last Name, First Name, Surname Prefix, Middle Name, ID, and Change Indicator. This list of results can be resorted on a column of your choice. Wildcards You can use wildcards in the Name field for searches, but they are not required. The underscore wildcard cannot be used to search on names. Name formattingThe name format can be set at your institution in the message.properties file for each application. The name format defines wh ich parts of the name are displayed, in what order, with what punctuation, and how many characters of each name element are displayed for the name, to the right of the ID field.The key is default.name.format . The elements that can be used to define the name format are: ŁLast name=$lastName ŁFirst name=$firstName ŁMiddle name=$mi ŁName Suffix=$nameSuffix ŁName Prefix=$namePrefix ŁSurname prefix=$surnamePrefix Some examples of name formats are: Łdefault.name.format=$lastName, $firstName Łdefault.name.format=$firstName $lastName Łdefault.name.format=$surnamePrefix $lastName, $firstName Other options are available for name formatting such as: ŁUpper/lower case Œ append toUpperCase() and toLowerCase() to the end of the element. For example, to show the entire last name in upper case: default.name.format=<%=lastName.toUpperCase()%>, <%=firstName%> /n 39Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface ŁDisplay a specific number of characters Œ append [first position..last position] to the element. For example, to show the first five characte rs of the last name (all lower case) and the first name in the case that it is saved in the database and separated by a comma: default.name.format=<%=lastName[0..4].toLowerCase()%>, <%=firstName%> ID and Name Results window In addition to using the advanced filter and query results for searches, you can also use the ID and Name Results window to refine your searches for persons and non-persons and perform extended searches. When you enter a full or partial ID in the ID field or a full or partial name in the Name field and use Enter or Tab, and more than one person or non-person record exists with that ID or name, the ID and Name Results window is displayed for extended searching. You can use wildcards in the Name field for searches, but they are not required. The underscore wildcard cannot be used to search on names. When you enter data in the Name field, each space-delineat ed group of characters is used to search on last name, first name, and middle name. You do not have to enter the name parts in any specific order or with any punctuation. For example, if you enter Mary Jane Smith , the search performed will look for Mary as a last name, first name, or middle name that has Jane as a last name, first name or middle name, and that has Smith as a last name, first name, or middle name. The ID and Name Results window displays the records for the persons and non-persons returned by the search. You can use the advanced filter in this window to further narrow down your results. You can sort on, hide, reorder, or freeze columns. A person or non- person can be listed multiple times if altern ate names or IDs exist. However, each person or non-person is only counted once. The count of total records, including alternate names and IDs, is displayed in the window. You can select a record and click OK to populate the ID and Name fields in the Advanced Filter. Or you can adjust your search in this window by entering a different full or partial ID or name. Use Enter or Tab to perform the ne w search. For example, if you searched on the name of Smith and viewed your results, you could then enter Smythe and search again. Data masking Masking can be applied directly to the ID and Name Results window through the GUQSRCH ID/Name Extended Search object, and can then be used with extended ID and name searches. Any maskin g rule applied to window will be available in the ID and Name Results window throughout the application, no matter which page is used to access the window. To find the field information for masking, open the ID and Name Results window and use the Item Properties key stroke ALT+I. If a field has a masking rule applied, the item will not be availabl e for searching on the advanced filter. Here is an example of a rule that can be used to mask the Birth Date field on the ID and Name Results window. /n 40Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface On the Data Display Mask Columns Page (G ORDMCL) the following record is needed: On the Data Display Mask Rules Page (GO RDMSK) the following record is needed: Field Value ObjectGUQSRCH BlockBanner9 ItemBanner9 Data Type CharacterLength 60Field Value ObjectGUQSRCH BlockextendedSearchBlock ItembirthDate Banner9 Object Nameextendedsearch Banner9 Block IDextendedSearchBlock Banner9 Item IDbirthDate Visible Unchecked (No) All Users Unchecked (No) User IDTest User ID (update to your tester™s user ID) /n 41Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Data masking Data masking is designed for administrative Banner masking only, not for Self-Service Banner. However a special entr y with an object type of SSB_MASKING can be used to enable the display of the last name prefix on the Banner Student Registration 9.x Self- Service pages accessed using the Register for Classes, Browse Classes, and View Registration Information paths. The only maski ng option used is the display indicator. Note: This does not apply to the Name and ID Search for students on the Select a Term page in Self-Service. The rules for changing the display of the last name pref ix are as follows. ŁRecords are needed on the Data Display Mask Column Page (GORDMCL). Ł Records are needed on the Data Display Mask Rules Page (GORDMSK). On the Data Display Mask Columns Page (GORDMCL), the following record should exist. On the Data Display Mask Rule s Page (GORDMSK), the following record should exist and can be updated to change the visibility. To display the last name prefix on the Ba nner Student Registration 9.x Self-Service pages, the Visible indicator should be updated to checked ( Y).Field Value ObjectSSB_MASKING BlockF_FORMAT_NAME ItemSPRIDEN_SURNAME_PREFIX Form Item Data Queried Into F_FORMAT_NAME Data Type CharacterLength 60System Required Checked (Yes) Field Value ObjectSSB_MASKING BlockF_FORMAT_NAME ItemSPRIDEN_SURNAME_PREFIX Visible Unchecked (No) All Users Checked (Yes) /n 42Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Note: A name format exists in the message.properties file. You can modify the default.name.format to include or exclude name elements. default.name.format=$surnamePrefix $lastName,$firstName $mi Please see the Banner Student Registration Installation Guide 9.x for information on updating the message.properties file while deploying the WAR file. Data masking and extended searches Masking can be applied directly to the ID and Name Results window through the GUQSRCH ID/Name Extended Search object. Th is can then be used with extended ID and name searches. Any maskin g rule applied to window will be available in the ID and Name Results window throughout the application, no matter which page is used to access the window. To find the field information for masking, open the ID and Name Results window and use the Item Properties key stroke ALT+I. If a field has a masking rule applied, the item will not be availabl e for searching on the advanced filter. Note: This does not apply to the Name and ID Search for students on the Select a Term page in Self-Service. A GORDMCL record is delivered for use wit h object records on the GORDMKS page. Scripts are delivered to: insert the record into GORDMCL, insert the object record into GUBOBJS, and insert th e GUBPAGE record for EXTENDED_SEARCH into the GORDMKS page. iCalendar FileThe iCalendar File can be used with Banner 9.x. This file is a univ ersal calendar format used by email and calendar programs (such as Microsoft Outlook, Google Calendar, and Apple iCal). It allows you to publish and share calendar information on the Web and through email. It can also be used to send meeting event requests which can be imported into your own calendar. iCalendar .ICS files are saved in a plain text forma t. The files contain information such as the event title, summary, start time, and end time. You can also update or cancel events. /n 43Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Information textInformation text can be used in Banner Student 9.x Self-Service Registration. It can be displayed as default or localized text and c an specifically be conf igured for display in Banner General 8.x. Some text types can be modified by administrative users. Configure Information Text You can use the Information Text Editor Page (GUAINFO) to config ure text messages for display on Self-Service pages. Text message types are categorized as follows: ŁNotifications ŁTool tip ŁPanelŁHeader ŁNormalNote: Refer to the Banner Student Registration Installation Guide 9.x for information on setting up roles in Web Tailor and editing the banner_configuration.groovy file for supported locale entries. Each informational text message displayed on a Self-Service page is associated with a Message Label value or key, which is delivered as seed data for the baseline record. The display of the text message can be restricted based on the target audience or persona. The text message can also be displayed in multiple languages depending on the locale specified on this page. Each text message ha s a start and end date. If end date is not specified, the text message will continue to be display ed on the Self-Service page. Use the Sequence Number value to display multiple text messages in sequence for each audience or locale. For example, if there are three text messages to be displayed, the text message with sequence number 1 will be displayed first, the text message with sequence number 2 will be displayed second, and the te xt message with sequence number 3 will be displayed third. The Source Indicator value of Baseline is selected as the default value, and a default text message is provided as seed data. To create a customized message, copy the baseline record and update the Source Indicator value to Local. ŁThe local text will be displayed if the current date is between the star t and end date on the local record, and text has been entered in the Message field. ŁThe baseline text is displayed when no local record exists, or when the current date is not in the range of dates specified on the local record. ŁNo text is displayed for the message when a local record exists and the message is blank, or when the local record has blank start and end dates. /n 44Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Perform the following steps to configure a text message to be displayed on a Banner Self- Service page: 1.Access the Information Te xt Editor Page (GUAINFO). 2.Select a row and copy it. Field behavior is as follows: ŁPage Name - value is copied, do not update ŁMessage Label - value is copied, do not update ŁSource Indicator - value is copied and defaults to LocalŁAudience - value is copied and can be updated. The delivered value is DEFAULT. If you need messages that are specific for a persona, copy the information text record and specify the appropriate role, such as REGISTRAR , STUDENT , etc. ŁLocale - value is copied and can be updated ŁSequence Number - value is copied, do not update This is only updated when additional sequ ences are added for the message label, audience, and local combination. ŁText Type - value is copied, do not update ŁMessage - user may update the text to customize it ŁComment - user may add a comment to provide information about the message ŁStart Date - user may specify the date to begin the text display ŁEnd Date - user may specify the date to end the text display 3.Save the changes. Update Information Text Specific kinds of Information Text can be modified by administrative users. ŁTool tips, which are context sensitive and used for assistance with fields. ŁNotification Center messages, when time sensitive and require a user response such as clicking OK.ŁRight side panels, such as Getting Started, which present information and instructions to the user. (This type of text is no longer configured in Banner Web Tailor.) ŁHeader, which is used for titles on tabs or page sections. ŁNormal, which is used for any other text on the page. /n 45Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Registration pages with Information Text The information text that is configured on GUAINFO can be used on the following pages for Banner Student Registration 9.x: ŁRegister for Classes path, Select a Term page ŁFind Classes page ŁPlan Ahead path, Select a Term page ŁTerms of Usage page ŁSecurity Questions and Answers page ŁRace and Ethnicity Survey page ŁUpdate Student Term Data page Setting 8.x Web Tailor globals Web Tailor global variables in Banner 8.x can be set from the Banner Student 9.x Registration application. The parameters are inserted into the Web Tailor Parameter Table (TWGRWPRM) before the user exits from Banner 9.x. This allows the Banner Self-Service 8.x page to retrieve the values from the table and perform validat ion. This functionality is housed in the RegistrationControllerUtility .Customized message displayWhen a customized error message is coded on SFARMSG and HTML commands are embedded in the message, the text will be displayed in the Notification Center in encoded format. The same is true for the display of customized labels from SOAWSCR where HTML commands are embedded in the label text. For example, a message from SFARMSG could read ACCT 101 CRN 10319: Long custom message for prerequisite and testscore error . Application NavigatorApplication Navigator facilitates seamless navi gation between Banner 8 .x forms and Banner 9.x administrative pages, allowing th em to behave like a single application. Application Navigator includes a unified menu and the ability to perform a unified search, /n 46Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface and it uses a common authentication mechanism to provide an integrated user experience. Users can navigate between the Ba nner modules using a single interface. The unified menu displays the existing Ban ner Student 8.x administrative menu system and is provided in addition to the Go To... and Related to Current list of pages used in Banner 9.x. The unified menu panel is displayed on the left side of the page and can be opened and closed. You can navigate up and down the menu tree in this panel and refer to the Recently Opened list. The unified menu is displayed when the Integrated indicator for the module and URL combination is checked on the Banner9 Module and Page Maintenance Page (GUAPAGE). The settings in Banner8/Banner9 Display Option field on the Object Maintenance Page (GUAOBJS) determine whethe r a page is displayed in Banner 9.x and which version of a page is displayed when it is selected from the unified menu. See the Application Navigator Handbook for detailed information on setting up and using this software component. Note: Application Navigator is delivered and installed separately from the Banner administrative applications. Banner 9.x applications contain a parameter in a configuration file that must be updated to integrat e with Application Navigator. For specific info rmation on installing and configuring Application Navigator, refer to the Application Navigator Installation Guide 1.x. Extensibility tools The Banner Extensibility tool s enable you to make chang es to your Banner 9.x applications without having to change the source code. The Ex tensibility tools available to you as part of this release are the Configur e Page Components Tool for ZK Applications and the Domain Extension Tool. For more information on th e Banner Extensibility Tools, see the Banner Extensibility Documentation Li brary in the Ellucian Support Center. The Configure Page Components Tool is embe dded in the application, but additional installation steps must be taken to enable its functionality. The Domain Extension Tool requires applicati on source code and is only available via the Ellucian source code repository. If you want to use this tool, you will need to establish a development environment and request access to the repository. More information can be found in the Domain Extension Tool for Developers Handbook . If you want to use either of these tool s, you may need to check with the person who completed the installation of the application to make sure they took the additional steps to enable the Extensibility tools. See the appendix in this handbook for more information. /n 47Banner Student Registration Handbook |Banner 9.x User Interface Configure Page Components Tool for ZK Applications The Configure Page Components Tool for ZK Applications enables you to customize delivered user interface common components and add new common components onto a page. You can hide fields that are not required , change the field type of delivered fields (within the bounds of the database functionalit y), and change the characteristics of fields. The tool is designed to be used primarily by a business analyst or functional application expert. The user should be someone who understands the application and basic relational database concepts. Users with the proper security can access the Configure Page Components Tool directly from the Tools menu on the Banner 9.x page they want to change. Domain Extension Tool The Domain Extension Tool enables you to make changes to a domain without having to change the Ellucian source code. It is intend ed to be used by an experienced developer. /n 48Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Registration Setup and UseThis chapter discusses setting up Registration for standard processing and using features that work differently than in Banner Student 8.x. Student Course Registration Page (SFAREGS) Important note for SFAREGS - Use the SFAREGS page in Banner 8.x for registration processing. An administrative registration display of course information exists in 9.x Student Self-Service. This registration view can be accessed and updated by users with the REGISTRAR persona, but it does not contain full processing functionality. OverviewThe topics in this chapter include: Łconfiguring search criteria, pages, and fields Łreviewing configuration seed data Łusing registration models Łsetting indicators for adds and drops Łusing permit-overrides Łsetting up bookstore links Łusing email and print schedule functions Łsetting up and using personas Łsearching on names and IDs Łusing holds notifications Łunderstanding the Copy button Administrative pages and tables The following pages are used specifically with Banner Student 9.x basic registration. ŁPersona Rules Page (SOAPERS) /n 49Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use ŁTerm Control Page (SOATERM) ŁOverall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) ŁPersona Validation Page (STVPERS) ŁOverall Configurable Page Field Validation Page (STVWSFD) ŁOverall Configurable Page Validation Page (STVWSPG) The following tables are used specifically with Banner Student 9.x basic registration. ŁStudent Registration Messages Table (SFRRSCM) ŁRegistration Student Term Version Table (SFRREGV) ŁTemporary Registration UI Table (SFTREGV) ŁPersona Rule Table (SORPERS) ŁOverall Page and Field Configuration Table (SORWSCR) ŁPersona Validation Table (STVPERS) ŁOverall Configurable Page Validation Table (STVWSPG) ŁOverall Configurable Page Field Validation Table (STVWSFD) Configure search criteria and results In Banner 9.x you can define and configure the class search criteria and results used on the Self-Service Registration pages. Search criteria elements can be configured by term. You can select the display of and display or der of the elements. You can also define the search criteria displayed based on the person a of the user (such as a student, a faculty member, an administrator, and so on). Element labels can be customized. The Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) is used to define Self- Service page and field text configurations for your institution. In Banner 9.x, this page takes the place of the Schedule Search Contro ls (search by schedule type, campus, level, course attribute, instructor, sessions, instructional method, duration) on the Term Control Page (SOATERM). SOAWSCR can be found on the Overall Configuration Menu (SRCHCONF), accessed from the Registration Menu (Registration). Note: The search controls are still used on SOATERM in Banner 8.x. The SOBTERM table has not been modified. The values in the columns on SOBTERM are ignored when the SOAWSCR page is implemented. Refer to the Banner Student 9.x Online Help for section and field details for the pages used with configuration. When configuration changes are made on SOAW SCR, you must exit from the application and log back in to see the changes take effect. /n 50Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) Here is a more detailed look at SOAWSCR. This page is used to maintain the registration page and field configuration definitions for your institution. Page elements are delivered as seed data. You can specify a persona, a page, and an effective term related to the fields that are available for configuration on a Self -Service Registration page. You can also define if an item is required, if an item is displayed, the display order of the fields on the page, and customized display text for the field labels. The customized label text is used instead of the delivered text. At least one it em must be displayed for each Self-Service Registration page. You cannot create or delete records on this page. You can modify seed data records. When a record is system required, you can edit information only for the Display Number, the Required indicator, the Displayed indicator, and the Custom Display Text field. When the Required indicator is checked, the Displayed indicator must also be checked and cannot be changed. When the Displayed indicator is unchecked, the Display Number is blank. Note: You can use the Data Extract option to save your data to an Excel spreadsheet. To use this page you need to set up page configuration codes on the Overall Configurable Page Validation Page (STVWSPG) and page field configuration codes on the Overall Configurable Page Field Validation Page (STVWSFD). The pages can be found on the Validation Form Sub Menu [STVTRCN - ST VXLBL] (STDVALD3G). Seed data is delivered for these pages. ŁThe Overall Configurable Page Validation Pa ge (STVWSPG) is used to define Self- Service Registration pages, sections of page s, and page panels that allow the use of configurable fields. ŁThe Overall Configurable Page Field Validat ion Page (STVWSFD) is used to define the fields that can be configured on the Self-Service Registration pages. Configuration rules can be copied from an existing term to a term that does not have any rules. Persona configuration information can be copied from one rule to a new persona rule. Fields that are configurable, such as those used for search criteria and displayed in the page grids, are defined on STVWSPG. The code values are named in the same manner as program variables in order to be easily understood within the program. Code values are system-required, and the user will never see the values unless he/she works in the actual program. Other validation tables also use fiEnglish-likefl codes that are not used for displayed text descriptions. On SOAWSCR, you can customize the field label text associated with the field code values, r earrange the field display order by sequence number, and hide fields you do not wish to display by unchecking the Displayed indicator. The default field labels are delivered in the message.properties files and the supported language versions of these files. Th e service that displays the field labels looks for a custom value defined in the Custom Display Text field (SORWSCR_DISPLAY_TEXT ) for the field to be displayed. If a custom value is found, it is used for the field label. If a custom value is not found, the value from the message.properties file is used. /n 51Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use The sb_pagefieldconfig API is used with SOAWSCR to maintain Self-Service registration page and field display configuration definitions. Review seed data You can view seed data for the following tabl es using SQL. These tables contain large amounts of seed data. Registration Configuration Table (SORWSCR) Seed data is delivered for this table for all pages, fields, and personas. Data is also provided for class searches and course sear ches. This data is used with the SOAWSCR page. For a full list of the required data, run the sscosorwscri.sql create script. This script can be found in the upgrade build folder. Next, run the following SQL script to return all system required values. select sorwscr_wspg_code,stvwspg_desc, sorwscr_pers_code, stvpers_desc, sorwscr_wsfd_code, sorwscr_display_ind, sorwscr_required_ind from stvpers, stvwspg, sorwscr where sorwscr_system_req_ind = 'Y' and stvpers_code = sorwscr_pers_code and stvwspg_code = sorwscr_wspg_code order by sorwscr_wspg_code, sorwscr_pers_code, sorwscr_wsfd_code; Overall Configurable Page Validation Table (STVWSPG) Seed data is delivered for this table for use with the SOAWSCR page. To review the system required values, use the following code. select * from stvwspg where stvwspg_system_req_ind = 'Y' order by stvwspg_code; Note: The Registration Landing page code of 1000 only looks at term 000000. /n 52Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Overall Configurable Page Field Validation Table (STVWSFD)Seed data is delivered for this table for use with the SOAWSCR page. To review the system required values, use the following code. select * from stvwsfd where stvwsfd_system_req_ind = 'Y' order by stvwsfd_code; Here are some notes regarding data for this table. ŁThe Faculty Card uses the following codes: facultyAddress, facultyCardPopup, facultyDepartment, fa cultyEmail, facultyName, facu ltyPhone, facultyPhoto, and facultyTitle. You can choose to not displa y the Faculty Card. However, the card will still appear if the user clicks on the link, but it will not contain faculty information. A message is displayed indicating that the faculty information is not available. ŁThe preferredPlan code cannot be removed from display on pages 400 (Planning My Summary), 410 (Plan Ahead Select a Student Plan), and 430 (Register for Classes Student Plans). ŁThe schedule type information (scheduleType code) is always displayed as part of the title information when the Displayed indicator is checked on SOAWSCR. The setting of the Display Number field does not have any effect on the display order on the page. Set up registration modelsYou can use simultaneous registration model settings for basic registration, structured registration, and projected registration. Registration model settings can be turned on or off by term. You can associate a CAPP program defin ition with a specific registration model by term. The registration model configuration you wish to use for processing is set up on the Term Control Page (SOATERM) in Banner 9.x and Program Requirements Form (SMAPROG) in Banner 8.x. The settings on SOATERM and SMAPROG determine what registration tabs are displayed to the student in Self-Service for the term and program. Term The Registration Model section in the Term Information options on SOATERM contains registration model indicators for Basic, Structured , and Projected. The Basic indicator is checked as the defaul t setting for the term. The registration model indicato rs allow you to define which models are allowed for a term. At least one selection is required or an error is displayed. Multiple models can be selected for a term. The settings can also be copied from one term to another. /n 53Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use ProgramThe Registration Model Code radio group on SMAPROG is used to select the registration model to be used with the program in the Key block. The values are Basic , Structured , and Projected . The default is Basic. Only one option can be selected, but you can set up different options by from and to term ranges for the program. ExamplesA program can have a different registration model for use in different terms. Program BA-MATH ŁTerm 201510 - Basic registration ŁTerm 201520 - Projected registration ŁTerm 201530 - Structured registration Different programs can use different regist ration model settings within the same term. Term 201530 ŁProgram BA-MATH - Structured ŁProgram BA-History - BasicSelf-ServiceWhen a student logs in to Self-Service, sele cts Register for Classes, and then selects a term, the page and tabs displayed are based on the settings on SOATERM and SMAPROG. The student can proceed through the registration path that is presented. ŁWhen the student™s program is set up for basic registration for the term, the Class Search and Registration page is displa yed with the Find Classe s, Enter CRNs, and Schedule and Options tabs. ŁWhen the student™s program is set up for projected registration for the term, the Class Search and Registration page is disp layed with the Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Projections, and Schedule and Options tabs . (The Plans tab is also displayed when registration planning is in use.) ŁWhen the student™s program is set up for structured registration for the term, the Class Search and Registration page is displayed with the Structured and Schedule and Options tabs. Set up add and drop controlsIndicators in the Self-Service Options section of the Tern Control Page (SOATERM) take the place of Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) rules previously used to process /n 54Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use conditional add and drop, drop last class, auto drops, and administrative drops. These indicators are only used in Banner 9.x. If these indicators are not used, the GTVSDAX rules will be used instea d. For example, if the value for Allow Student to Drop their Last Class is Null , and the WEBDROPLST rule is set to Y or N, that value will become the default. Please refer to the fiAutomatic Dropsfl sect ion of the fiRegistrationfl chapter in the B anner Student Self-Service 8.x User Guide for information on using autodrop processing. Here are the details for these SOATERM indicators. SOATERM indicator GTVSDAX rule Allow Student to Select C onditional Add DropCONDADDDRP Allow Student to Drop their Last ClassWEBDROPLST Auto Drop, Connected Cour se, Drop Errors AUTODROP Administration Drop Connected Course Errors ADMINDROP FieldsDescriptions Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop Check box used to indicate whether students can use conditional adding and dropping during registration in Self-Service. This is used when an error occurs after the student submits registration selections. The entire registration process is cancelled, even if other classes submitted for registration do not have any errors. When this indicator is not checked, classes without errors can still be processed for registration. Values are saved to the database as Y or N.Allow Student to Drop their Last Class Check box used to indicate whether students can drop their last class during registration in Self-Service. Values are saved to the database as Y or N./n 55Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Permit-overridesPermit-overrides are applied to a student's registration record in Banner 9.x when a student initiates registration for a class in Banner Student Self-Service. Existing permit- overrides from Banner 8.x are applied when a student initially adds a class to his/her registration record or re-registers for a clas s after it was dropped, and the drop was not a drop/delete. In this case, the administrator may have added the permit-override after the student dropped the class. Auto Drop Connected Course Drop ErrorsRadio group used to indicate how automatic drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. When the student submits the registration selections and then tries to drop one class from a pair of classes with a link, corequisite, or prerequisite, an error is received, but other registration selections can still be processed. Choices are: ŁDrop Connected Course - Both classes are automatically dropped. Saved to the database as Y.ŁDo Not Drop, Display Error - The student receives an error, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Saved to the database as N.ŁConfirm to Drop - The student receives a message asking if the other class in the pair can be automatically dropped. Saved to the database as C.ŁAllow Connected Drops - The student can drop any class, even if it is a linked course, a corequisite, or a prerequisite. No cross checking is performed for t he missing connected class. Saved to the database as I.Administration Drop Connected Course Errors Radio group used to indicate how administrative drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. When the student first comes into registration after selecting a term, if the student has registration errors that are from a connected class, the class is automatically dropped. The student has no control over this drop event. Choices are: ŁDrop - The class is automatically dropped. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Saved to the database as Y.ŁDo Not Drop, Report in Administrative Error Table - An error is reported, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Saved to the database as N.ŁDo Not Report and Do Not Drop - No error is reported, and no automatic action is tak en by the system. Saved to the database as I.FieldsDescriptions /n 56Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Bookstore linksYou can set up links in Self-Service that allow students to access online bookstores and review required course materials when sele cting classes for registration. The Higher Education Opportunity Act (HEOA) may requ ire that at least one bookstore link be configured at your institution as a hyperlink to an online book site. Sites can include your institution™s internal campus bookstor e and/or external online book sellers. The bookstore links are configured in the StudentRegistrationSsb_configuration.groovy file and are available at the section level for a course. You can also set up the Bookstore Links option to access a secondary custom page at your institut ion that displays the bookstore links. A student can do the following to access the bookstore links. 1.Click on the course title and access the Class Details window. 2.Select the Bookstore Links option. 3.View the institution™s bookstore links and select one to access a bookstore. The options in the Class Details window are configured on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). The fields displayed on SOAWSCR can be used as valid substitution parameters in the bookstore URL links. You can link to bookstore sites in several ways: Łlink to a website with no parameters Łlink to a website using hardcoded parameters Łlink to a website with dynamic parameters defined on SOAWSCR for section search results Łlink to a website specific to the campus code (STVCAMP) associated with the class sectionEnter the following parameters to set up a bookstore link. ParameterRequired or OptionalInstructions URLRequiredEnter a valid URL fo r the link to the bookstore. LabelRequired Enter the message.properties code to be displayed as the hyperlink label. You will need to add the code and the label text to the messages.properties file. The bookstore.links.follett sample is delivered and can be used as a guide. /n 57Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Three options are available when substituting parameters in the URL. ŁAccess the Overall Page and Field Configur ation Page (SOAWSCR) and select a value for substitution. INSTRUCTOR and MEETINGTIME are not valid options. ŁIdentify the element directly from the sect ion object in the code , if it is not on SOAWSCR. For example: .termDesc will retrieve the section.termDesc in the parameter. Additional examples include: .partOfTerm , .subject , .campus , .campusDescription , and .college .ŁStudent name may be passed to the bookstore link by supplying NAME in the parameter list. The name will be formatte d as identified in th e General Person plugin messages.properties file for default.name.format which is used throughout the Banner 9.x administr ative and Self-Service applications. If you are using variables, use "{0}", "{1}" , and so on, as place holders for the parameters appearing in the same order in the params array. Examples of link configurations Here are some examples of possible configurations for bookstore links. Warning! These examples should not be followed as written. Please consult with the third party vendors to identify the current webapp service URL and required parameters. Display bookstore link based on campus codeThe Borders bookstore link will only be displayed if the course section is associated with a campus code that is equal to 1.CampusOptionalEnter specific links based on the campus code. For example, if you have multiple campuses and you wish to use a different Follett bookstore number for each campus, you would include a URL configuration for each campus and include the campus code in the URL parameters. PageRequired, if the Params item is usedEnter the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page number, if the URL is specific to the search results where 30 is equal to Section .ParamsOptionalReview the options for parameter substitutions in the URL. See the information below. ParameterRequired or OptionalInstructions /n 58Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use bookstore = [ [url:"http://www.borders.com", label:"bookstore.links.borders", campus:"1"], ]]Display bookstore link for all sectionsThe Barnes and Noble bookstore link will be displayed with all sections. bookstore = [ [url:"https://www.barnesandnoble.com", label:"bookstore.links.barnesAndNoble"], ]]Display bookstore link based on campus ID and parameters The Follet book site will require substitution of with the actual campus ID, as well as parameters wh ich will be substituted at run time. bookstore = [ url:"http://www.bkstr.com/webapp/wcs/stores/servlet/ booklookServlet?bookstore_id-1=&term_id-1={0}&dept- 1={1}&course-1={2}&sect--1={3}", label: "bookstore.links.follett", page: "30", params: ["TERM",".department","COURSENUMBER","COURSEREFERENCENUMBER"] ] Configuration on SOAWSCR The following data is delivered for use with the bookstore setup. Note: When the user selects Browse Classes and accesses the bookstore information before logging in, the 01 Anonymous persona is used instead of the 02 Student persona. Field Value Persona 02 Student Page100 Class Details Popup Effective Term 000000 Display Number 2Field and description SCHEDULEBOOKSTORELINKS Bookstore Links /n 59Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Email and print scheduleYou can set up links in Self-Service to email a schedule and print a schedule. Email can be sent from the Schedule and Options, Look Up a Schedule, and Schedule by Centric Period pages. Schedules can be printed fr om the Schedule and Options and Look Up a Schedule pages. You can enable either emailing or printing, or both items. Configuration is done in the StudentRegistrationSsb_configuration.groovy file and should be performed by someone familiar with your mail host. The ma il host must be your SMTP server. The your.smtp.address would be your institution™s email address, such as mail.school.edu or a valid IP address to the mail server. The default for the from address will be that email address. When sent to students, it is displayed in the fiFromfl field of the email. This email address must also be a valid email address within your DNS/ email server, and preferably is for an email account that is not actively monitored. Here is some sample code. grails { mail { host = "mailhost.sct.com" }}grails.mail.default.from="firstname.lastname@ellucian.com" allowPrint = true Using PersonasPersonas are used within Registration Self-Service processing to determine display configuration and page access. Detail availabl e on the Self-Service pages is determined based on the display configurations set up by persona. A person can have a single persona or multiple personas. Personas can be used for students, advisors, faculty members, and admin istrators, such as registrars. Anonymous users can also have a persona. Personas are extensions of and are mapped to Banner DisplayedYes, checked Display TextBookstore Links RequiredNo, unchecked System RequiredYes, checked Field Value /n 60Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Web Tailor roles and include more specific data than Web Tailor. For example, the FACULTY role in Web Tailor has been separated into distinct persona types for FACULTY , ADVISOR , and both FACULTY AND ADVISOR for use with Banner 9.x. The REGISTRAR role is manually assigned in Web Tailor. The persona using this role must have a login to Self-Service. Registrars can access pages that are similar to the pages accessed by students and faculty members, but these pages contain additional functionality. This persona can select any term and student for processing. The Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) is used to configure page information display, display order, and field labels on Registration Self-Service pages. Personas-based page access is also confi gured on SOAWSCR. The configuration is based on the persona, page, and term combination in the Key block. You can copy data from one term to another and from one persona to another on this page. Use the Persona Validation Page (STVPERS) to create and ma intain codes for personas used with Banner Student Self-Service Regi stration. Personas cont rol what pages can be accessed in Self-Service by a user and what tasks can be performed. Values can be system required. Use the Persona Rules Page (SOAPERS) to set up rules used with persona entities. Each rule is associated with a Web Tailor role and the appropriate persona type, such as administrative, faculty, student, or proxy. Personas rules control what pages can be accessed in Self-Service by a user and wh at tasks can be performed. SOAPERS can be found on the Overall Configuration Menu (SR CHCONF), accessed from the Registration Menu (Registration). The following seed data is used with STVPERS. The following seed data is used with SOAPERS. CodeDescription System Required FACULTYADVISOR AdvisorYes FACULTYBOTH Faculty and Advisor Yes FACULTYINSTRUCTORFaculty Yes PROXY Proxy Yes REGISTRARRegistrar Yes STUDENTStudent Yes WEBUSERAnonymousYes CodeDescriptionWeb Tailor Role System RequiredFACULTYADVISORAdvisor FACULTY Yes FACULTYBOTH Faculty and AdvisorFACULTY Yes /n 61Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Note: The default settings for the Faculty Card and Update Student Term Data pages are not yet included in the SOAWSCR seed data for the REGISTRAR persona. Use the Copy Persona button on SOAWSCR to copy settings from the STUDENT or FACULTY persona types to the REGISTRAR persona. The configurations for the STUDENT persona will be used if neither of these pages has configuration rules for the FACULTY and ADMINISTRATIVE persona types. When you log in to Banner Student Self-Service Registration, and your login user ID has access to multiple personas, you are taken to the Persona Selection page. The roles available for your persona are displayed. Persona choices include: Student , Registrar , Faculty , Advisor, and Faculty and Advisor . You can choose one, click OK, and continue to the Registration Landi ng page. If your login user ID has only one persona, you are not given this choice, and the person a functionality becomes transparent. This situat ion will apply to most students and faculty members, as they are only set up as a STUDENT persona or a FACULTY persona. You can switch your persona at any time during your session using the breadcrumbs or Back button to return to the Registration Landing page. The selected persona is displayed at the top of the page, to the left of the us ername. If you have multiple personas, and the persona in use does not have access to a specific page, you are prompted to change your role to continue. If you return to the Registration Landing page and you have multiple personas, the displayed persona becomes a link. Select the link to access the Persona Selection page and change your persona. Persona typesThe following persona types are us ed with registration processing. ŁANONYMOUS (WEBUSER) ŁSTUDENT ŁFACULTY ŁADVISORFACULTYINSTRUCTORFacultyFACULTYYes PROXYProxyPROXYACCESSYes REGISTRARRegistrarREGISTRARYes STUDENTStudentSTUDENTYes WEBUSERAnonymousWEBUSERYes CodeDescriptionWeb Tailor Role System Required/n 62Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use ŁFACULTY AND ADVISOR ŁREGISTRARWeb Tailor role mapping Here is a summary of the personas used wit h Registration Self-Service, the mapped Web Tailor roles, and information on settings, defaults, and access. PersonaWeb Tailor RoleAdditional Information ANONYMOUSWEBUSERNo login is required. The user can access the Browse Classes and Browse Course Catalog paths. Only one anonymous persona type should exist. The Access Code field on SOAPERS is set to Anonymous for the rule. The user can select any term where the Activate on Web indicator is checked on SOATERM. STUDENTSTUDENTA login is required. This is the default persona assignment when the person has been admitted and has a student record. A user with this persona can access pages associated with this Web Tailor role. REGISTRARREGISTRARA login is required. This persona requires that the security administrator assign the end user to the Web Tailor role on the Web Tailor Administrator Role Assignment page. The user must have valid pin on the GOATPAD page for login. The user can select any term where the Activate on Web indicator is checked on SOATERM. /n 63Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use FACULTYFACULTYA login is required. This is the default persona assignment when the person is defined as a faculty member, is active, and is assigned to a faculty appointment type on SIAINST. The Schedule indicator must be checked for the person to be a faculty member. This is an eligible persona if the appointment is active for a term range in which there is a current access date rule. If no access date rules exist, a ll terms are accessible. The persona is assigned based on the current date and the date ranges entered in the Faculty and Advisors Access Dates section of SOATERM for term display and menu access, and the Menu indicator is checked. A user with this persona can access pages based on the faculty security process rule s on SOAFACS. Access can depend on your institution™s student PIN entry requirements. ADVISORFACULTYA login is required. This is the default persona assignment when the person is defined as a faculty member, is active, and is assigned to an advisor appointment type on SIAINST. The Schedule indicator must be checked for the person to be a faculty member. Advisors share the same access eligibility as faculty members, based on the current date and the dates entered in the Faculty and Advisors Access Dates section of SOATERM for term display and menu access, and the Menu indicator is checked. A user with this persona can access pages based on the faculty security process rule s on SOAFACS. Access can depend on your institution™s student PIN entry requirements. FACULTY AND ADVISORFACULTYA login is required. This is the default persona assignment when the person is defined as a faculty member, is active, and is assigned to a faculty appointment type and an advisor appointment type on SIAINST. The persona is assigned based on the current date and the date ranges entered in the Faculty and Advisors Access Dates section of SOATERM for term display and menu access, and the Menu indicator is checked. A user with this persona can access pages based on the faculty security process rule s on SOAFACS. Access can depend on your institution™s student PIN entry requirements. PersonaWeb Tailor RoleAdditional Information /n 64Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Determine persona assignments In preparation for using personas, consider the following. 1.Review all available Web Tailor roles to which the person is assigned. 2.Review all default roles for the person. 3.Compare the roles to the page permissions. 4.Select the persona the person may need for page access. 4.1. When a person only has one persona, that persona is used for all needed access. 4.2. Verify the persona for specific access , such as faculty members who can be separated into advisors and non-advisors. Persona flowHere is a sample of how a user would access and move through Self-Service when personas are in use. 1.The user accesses the Registration Self-Ser vice application and sees the Registration Landing page. 2.The user selects a link that requires a log in , and the user logs in to the application. 3.When multiple personas exist, the user sees the Persona Selection page and is prompted to select a persona from a list. The selection determines the paths that are available. A user with a single persona, such as a student, does not see this list, as the role is defaulted. 4.The user opens a specific page from a link on the Registration Landing page, and the selected persona is validated and defaulted to the page. ŁIf the user tries to access a page to which the persona does not have access, whether the role has been defaulted or selected, an error is displayed. ŁIf only one role exists, access to the page is denied. ŁIf multiple roles exist, the user is prompted to select another role to access the page. 5.The Select a Term page is displayed, and the terms available are dependent on the user™s persona. 6.The persona in use is displayed at the top of the page, to the left of the user name. 7.The pages carry that persona forward until the user changes to a different persona. 8.The persona can be changed on the Regist ration Landing page by clicking on the displayed persona and selecting a different persona from the list on the Persona Selection page. 9.The user can continue with registration pr ocessing using the newly selected persona. /n 65Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Persona securityThe persona type code includes the rule that cont rols the type of security that is used. For example: ŁSTUDENT - Students can only access their own records. ŁREGISTRAR - Administrators can access any student and term. ŁFACULTY , ADVISOR , and FACULTY AND ADVISOR - Faculty members and advisors must enter a student™s password and can be limited to students with which they are associated. Faculty securityFaculty security is executed for the FACULTY , ADVISOR , and FACULTY AND ADVISOR persona type codes. This is necessary fo r registration processing, as a faculty member or advisor has the ability to enter the term, the student, and the student™s password. When using registration planning, the faculty process rules defined on the Faculty/Advisor Process Rules Page (SOAFACS) for the PLANAHEAD process are followed. See the "Faculty Security - Plan Ahead Path" topic in the "Registration Planning" chapter for information on seed data used with the Process Control Code Validation Page (STVPROC) and the Faculty/Advisor Pr ocess Rules Page (SOAFACS) for the PLANAHEAD process. Registration Landing page configuration Here are the configurations by persona for links displayed on the Registration Landing page in Self-Service. The configurations are defined on SOAWSCR. ANONYMOUS The following links are displayed for the ANONYMOUS persona type. ŁPrepare for Registration ŁRegister for Classes ŁBrowse Classes ŁBrowse Course Catalog ŁPlan Ahead ŁView Registration Information /n 66Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use STUDENTThe following links are displayed for the STUDENT persona type. ŁPrepare for Registration ŁRegister for Classes ŁBrowse Classes ŁBrowse Course Catalog ŁPlan Ahead ŁView Registration Information FACULTY, ADVISOR, FACULTY AND ADVISOR The following links are displayed for the FACULTY AND ADVISOR persona type. ŁRegister for Classes ŁPlan Ahead ŁBrowse Classes ŁBrowse Course Catalog REGISTRARThe following links are displayed for the REGISTRAR persona type. ŁRegister for Classes ŁBrowse Classes ŁBrowse Course Catalog ŁPrepare for Registration ŁPlan Ahead ŁView Registration Information Persona accessHere is a summary of current persona access. /n 67Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Name and ID searchUsers who are administrators and faculty me mbers or advisors can search on student names or Banner IDs for a term on the Select a Term page in Self-Service. This allows the user to perform a quick search on a student for a term without leaving the page and then continue with registration. The search criteria displayed changes depending on the user™s persona type code, such as REGISTRAR , FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR .The registrar or administrator can enter a partia l ID and view a list of results. The registrar can then change the term for the student, change the study path for the student, or change both and proceed with registration. The user who is either a faculty member, an advisor, or both, can also enter a partial ID and view a list of results. The faculty member or advisor may be limited to searching for their assigned students or advisees. The ALLADVR , ALLFAC , and REGADVISEE GTVSDAX rules for the FACWEB internal code group control whether the facu lty member or advisor can search beyond their classes or advisees. The faculty member or advisor must enter the student's password to access the Self-S ervice registration pages. Holds notificationsHolds processing messages are used in the Prepare for Registration path and the Register for Classes path. In addit ion to the general message that Holds Exist , the details of each hold are presented and are based on holds for the student found on the Hold Information Page (SOAHOLD). Holds are divided into two categories, holds t hat prevent registration and holds that do not prevent registration. Holds can also be consi dered as "sensitive" and are not for shared viewing.Self-Service pathSTUDENTREGISTRAR FACULTY, ADVISOR, FACULTY AND ADVISOR Register for ClassesYes Yes Yes, requires student PIN Prepare for RegistrationYes Yes NoPlan Ahead Yes NoYes, when faculty security process PLANAHEAD is in use View Registration InformationYesNoNo Class SearchYesYesYes Course SearchYesYesYes /n 68Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use ŁFor the registrar only, when a hold type has the Web Indicator check box unchecked (set to N) on the Hold Type Code Validation Page (STVHLDD), hold details are displayed to the registrar, and the hold is de signated as a "sensitive hold". The message Sensitive registration holds ex ist. Do not display this sens itive hold information to others is presented. ŁFor the student only, when a hold type has the Web Indicator check box unchecked (set to N) on the Hold Type Code Validation P age (STVHLDD), hold details are not displayed to the student. The message Please note that some holds are sensitive and may not display on this page is presented. This indicates that additional holds exist. Prepare for Registration path In the Prepare for Registration path, hold messages are displayed to students and registrars when the term is entered on the Select a Term page. Hold details are also displayed. Register for Classes path In the Register for Classes path, hold messages that prevent registration are displayed to students, faculty members, advisors, and re gistrars when the term is entered on the Select a Term page. Holds details are also displayed. Hold messages and details are displayed in the Notification Center. Holds that do not prevent registration are not displayed. For holds that prevent registration and can be overridden, a registrar can use the Holds Password field on the Select a Term page. The message You must enter the holds password to proceed is displayed in the Notification Center for the specific hold. Holds rules and settingsThe display of notification mess ages is controlled by settings in administrative Banner. For users who log in as faculty members or advisors and have those personas, the display of holds is based on the DISPLAYHOLDS (Display Student Holds) process rules on the Faculty/Advisor Process Rules Page (SOAFACS). ŁWhen the rules on SOAFACS have not been met, the message You have holds which prevent registration is displayed. ŁWhen the rules on SOAFACS have been met, specific messages with hold details are displayed. Only holds which prevent a student from re gistering are considered for notification purposes in the Register for Classes path. The settings on the Hold Type Code Validation Page (STVHLDD) for the Registration check box and the Web Indicator check box determine the notification for a hold type code. ŁWhen the Web Indicator is checked (set to Y) and the Registration check box is not checked (set to N), the generic hold message You have holds which prevent registration /n 69Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use is displayed. This indicates to the faculty member or advisor that additional holds exist for the student. Hold details can be viewed fo r the student on the Hold Information Page (SOAHOLD). ŁWhen the Web Indicator is not checked (set to N), the message Please note that some holds are sensitive and may not display on this page is displayed for the faculty member or advisor. Hold details can be viewed for the student on the Hold Information Page (SOAHOLD). ŁWhen the Web Indicator is not checked (set to N) but the Registration indicator is checked (set to Y), a message is presented that ho lds exist which cannot be displayed. ŁWhen the Web Indicator is checked (set to Y) and the Registration indicator is checked (set to Y), the holds are displayed. Note: The Web Indicator applies only to the student persona. It does not apply to registrars or administrators. When process rules for DISPLAYHOLDS are in use on SOAFACS for users who log in as faculty members or advisors and have those per sonas, notification processing considers additional attributes for holds messaging. ŁWhen SOAFACS rules are met, holds are displayed in the Notification Center with details. When sensitive holds exist for the st udent, that message is also displayed. ŁWhen SOAFACS rules are not met, the generic holds message is displayed. Registration with holds checking is also d ependent on the Section Options setting for Holds on the Term Control Page (SOATERM). ŁWhen the Holds option is set to Fatal , registration cannot proceed. Hold can be overridden by the registrar using the Holds Password field on the Select a Term page. The holds password is defined on SOATERM. Processing behavior for the holds password is the same as on the Student Course Registration Page (SFAREGS). ŁWhen the Holds option is set to Warning or No Check, the following occurs: ŁUsers who log in as faculty members or advisors and have those personas can continue with registration for the student. ŁUsers who log in as students and have the student persona can continue with registration. SOAFACS rules The settings on SOAFACS for the DISPLAYHOLDS rules are considered for the display of holds messages. /n 70Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Indicator Processing Details Process Available on Self-ServiceThis indicator must be checked for the process rule to be used in Self-Service. PIN ControlThe setting of this indicator does not apply (whether checked or unchecked), as the faculty member or advisor must always enter the student™s password for registration when in the Register for Classes path. All AccessWhen this indicator is checked, no security is invoked. The faculty member or advisor can view hold details for a student that prevent registration. RelationshipWhen this indi cator is checked, the following must be true for the faculty member or advisor to view hold details for the student that prevent registration. ŁThe faculty member must have a teaching relationship with the student, that is he/she is the instructor for a section (CRN) in which the student is enrolled. The instructor does not have to be the primary instructor. This information can be viewed in the Instructor information on the Schedule Page (SSASECT). ŁThe advisor must have an advising relationship with the student, that is he/she is affiliated with th e student on the Multiple Advisors Page (SGAADVR). The advisor does not have to be the primary advisor. This information can be viewed in the Advisor Information section on SGAADVR. PrimaryWhen this indicator is checked, the faculty member must be the primary instructor, and the advisor must be the primary advisor, in order to view hold details for the student that prevent registration. ŁThe faculty member must have the Primary Indicator checked on the Schedule Page (SSASECT). ŁThe advisor must have the Primary Indicator checked on the Multiple Advisors Page (SGAADVR)./n 71Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Setup and Use Copy buttonThe Copy button, used to copy data from an existi ng term to a new term, can be found in the Key block of various administrative registration pages. The Copy button state (enabled or disabled) is set as follows: ŁThe Copy button is disabled if records exist for the term entered in the Term field. ŁThe Copy button is enabled if records do not exist for the term entered in the Term field. ŁThe Copy button state is not set until you leave the Term field.ŁIf the prior term va lue has no existing records, the Copy button is enabled based on that value. When you enter a new term in the Term field for which there is an existing record, the Copy button is not disabled until you tab or click outside of the Term field.ŁIf the prior term value ha s existing records, the Copy button is disabled based on that value. When you enter a new term in the Term field for which there is no existing record, the Copy button is not enabled until y ou tab or click outside the Term field. Attribute Type CheckingWhen th is indicator is checked, the process checks the faculty attribute or the advisor type to verify that the hold details can be viewed. ŁThe faculty attribute is set up on the Faculty/Advisor Information Page (SIAINST), in th e Faculty Attributes information, for a code of FACL - Faculty Web .On the Faculty Attribute/Advisor Type Control Page (SOAFAPC) in the Access Role Processing section, the system checks the faculty attribute on SIAINST and cross-references it to SOAFAPC. This allows the faculty member to view the hold details for the student. ŁThe advisor type is set up on the Multiple Advisors Page (SGAADVR) for a code of MAJR - Major .On the Faculty Attribute/Advisor Type Control Page (SOAFAPC) in the Access Role Processing section, the system checks the advisor type on SGAADVR and cr oss-references it to SOAFAPC. This allows the advisor to view the hold details for the student. Indicator Processing Details /n 72Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration Block RegistrationThis chapter details the set up and processing for block registration. OverviewBlock registration allows you to facilitate registration by creati ng blocks of courses that can be made available to the student during Self-S ervice Registration. There are three primary ways that the student can have access to blocks during registration. Blocks can be: Łpre-assigned to individual students manually Łpre-assigned to students using a batch process Łmade available to the student at registration based on pre-defined rules Students can be required to enroll in a pre-assigned block or be given the option to select an alternate block. Students can also select blocks on their own during registration. When multiple rules apply to a student, the rule with the highest priority is used. You can set up block assignment rules with characteristics that a student must meet in order for a specific rule to apply. Blocks are then assigned to the rule. Additional rules can be set during batch pre-assignment for pre-a ssignment limit checking in a block, and permit-override codes for registration can be automatically generated. You can also define whether students can add or drop courses by block only or by non-block only, or if all courses can be changed. This functionality is used within the Class Sear ch and Registration page in Banner Student Self-Service. The Blocks tab is used to acce ss the block registration information. Students can then proceed with registration. Warning! The block schedule functionality used in Banner 8.x has not been modified. You cannot mix the 8. x block schedule functionality with the 9.x block registration functionality. You must use one or the other. The two types of functionality will be modifi ed to be compatible in a future release. ProcessingThis section discusses setting up and using block registration. The following Banner Student 9.x administrati ve pages are used with block registration. ŁBlock Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) /n 73Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration ŁBlock Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) ŁPre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) ŁStudent Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) ŁStudent Block Selectio n Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) The pages are listed on the Block Registra tion Menu (BLOCKREG) which can be found on the Registration Menu (REGISTRATION). The following tables are used specifically with Banner Student 9. x block registration. ŁBlock Capacity Definition Table (SFBBLCD) ŁBlock Registration Control Optional Indicator Table (SFRBKOP) ŁBlock Student Pre-Assignment Table (SFRBLPA) ŁBlock Rules Detail Table (SFRBRDB) ŁBlock Rules Table (SFRBRDH) ŁStudent Course Block Regi stration Table (SFRBSEL) ŁBlock Term Configuration Table (SFRPABC) The following Banner 8.x report and process are used with this block registration. ŁStudent Pre-Assignme nt Process (SFPSBPA) ŁIncomplete Registration Report (SFRIBLR) A Blocks tab is available on the Class Search and Registration page Banner Student Self- Service.Set up and use block registrationDo the following to set up and use block registration. 1.Build block codes in Banner Student 8.x on the Block Code Validation Page (STVBLCK).2.Define blocks of CRNs for a term in Ba nner Student 9.x on th e Block Registration Control Page (SFABLCK). Note: SFABLCK is used in place of the Block Schedule Control Page (SSABLCK), as it allows for a pre-assi gnment limit control. This control is used by the SFPSBPA process. 2.1. Enter the pre-assignment limit control for the block. 2.2. Indicate whether enrollment in the course is optional. 2.3. Review section detail for each course, including if special approval is needed to register for the course. /n 74Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration 3.Define rules in Banner Student 9.x on the Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF). 3.1. Define the term for wh ich the rule applies. 3.2. Define the priority for the rule. 3.3. Specify the characteristics which the studen t must have in order for the rule to apply. 3.4. Indicate whether the block selection is required. 3.5. Indicate whether the student should be allowed to change to a different block once a block has been selected. 3.6. Indicate whether the rule is active. 3.7. For block settings, indicate whether t he block can be pre-assigned in batch using the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA). 3.8. For block settings, select the add and drop restriction. 4.Set up block and course restrictions by term in Banner Student 9.x on the Pre- Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC). 4.1. Indicate whether block registration is available in Self-Service for a given term. 4.2. Indicate whether the student can make changes to the block. 4.3. Indicate whether an override should be created when a student selects a pre- assigned block. 4.4. Enter the permit/override code to be created when the student registers for a pre-assigned block. 4.5. Set the course restrictions for adding and dropping to block course only, non- block courses only, or any courses. 5.Run the Student Block Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) from Banner 8.x job submission to pre-assign blocks to a student or to a population selection. 6.Pre-reassign a block to a student by ID, term, and study path in Banner Student 9.x using the Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA). 6.1. Create a manual pre-assignment. 6.2. Review if the block was assigned ma nually or in batch by SFPSBPA. 6.3. Enter a permit-override code if needed. 6.4. Review the rule details, including whether the rule is active and whether block selection is required for registration. 7.Query information for blocks in which the student has chosen to register in Banner Student 9.x on the St udent Block Selection Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL). 7.1. Define the query for an ID, term, and study path. 7.2. Review the block detail, including whet her the block was manually assigned, special approval, and permit-override information. 7.3. Review the rule detail, including whethe r the rule is active and whether block selection is required for registration. /n 75Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration 8.Run the Incomplete Registration Report (SFRIBLR) from Banner 8.x job submission to retrieve students who have not successfully registered for all the courses in a block. You can use a population selection. Pre-assignment limit controlDefining the block on SFABLCK includes settin g the block pre-assignme nt limit. This is used by the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) to restrict how many students can be pre-assigned to a specific block. When the Verify Capacity parameter is set to Y, once the number of assignments has reached the pre-assignment li mit, no additional students will be assigned to the block. Automated permit-override creationWhen pre-assignment limit checking, student attributes, special approval, or other restrictions are used to limit registration to sections within blocks during pre-assignment, you can then assign a permit-override code to the block as part of pre-assignment. During registration, when the student selects the pre- assigned block, a permit-override for each CRN associated with the block will be created and will allow for an override. Permit-override rules are defined on the Re gistration Permit-Overrides Control Page (SFAROVR). Permit-override codes can be entered on the Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) when the Create Override indicator is checked. When the Generate Ovr Permissi on parameter is set to Y in the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA), that code will be attach ed to the student's pre-assignment record. Student characteristics Block registration rules apply to students based on the primary curriculum or the study path when it is active. You can use characterist ics to apply a more specific rule to a group of students. Use the Block Rule Definition Pa ge (SFABRDF) to add student attributes to a rule. You can assign a high priority to the rule to ensure it is used during registration. You can assign a low priority, not assign a block to the rule, and make the rule inactive, so it applies to the student but does not show any a ssociated blocks. This allows the student to register for courses without having to select a block. Pre-assign blocks to studentThe Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) is used to pre-assign blocks to students based on the rules created on the Block Rules Definition Page (SFABRDF). The pre-assignment process is run for a term for a specific ID, a population selection of students, or for all students. The process uses the primary curriculum record and any active study paths. Blocks are assigned based on the setting of the Assign Block to Student indicator on SFABRDF. When multiple blocks exist, stud ents are distributed alternately by SFPSBPA /n 76Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration among the blocks for the rule until the block pre-assignment limit defined on SFABLCK is reached. Pre-assigned block results can be viewed on the Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA). Review incomplete registrationThe Incomplete Registration Report (SFRIBLR) is used to retrieve students that are not registered in all the courses of a selected bl ock for registration. Reporting is performed for the catalog or sc hedule level. ŁFor the catalog level, the stude nt is considered to be incomplete when not registered in all the distinct courses (subject code plus course number) for the CRNs in the block. ŁFor the schedule level, the st udent is considered to be incomplete when not registered in all the CRNs (course sections) in the block. The report is run for a term for a specific ID, a popu lation selection of students, or for all students. You can choose to generate detailed or summary output. The summary output shows the primary curriculum, number of missing courses, and total credits for registration. The detailed output shows the sa me information plus the missing courses by subject and course combination or by CRN. Administrative pages The following administrative pages are used with this functionality. Please refer to the Banner Student 9.x Online Help for descriptions of page sections and field definitions. Block Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) The Block Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) is used to define blocks of courses by term for block registration in Banner Student Self-Service. Open learning CRNs can be used in blocks. The block pre-assignment limit is required. Once the pre-assignment limit has been reached for a block when the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) is run, no more assignments can be made. Enrollment status and time conflict messages are displayed by CRN. CRNs in a block are considered to be mandatory for registration unless the student has add and drop permission or the Enrollment Optional indicator is checked fo r the course within the block. Credit and billing hours can be assigned to th e CRN if they are specified as variable hours. For example, if a CRN has three to five credit hours, you can change the value to be specifically four credit hours for use in the block of courses. The grade mode can also be changed. The detail information for each CRN is displayed for reference from the SSBSECT table. /n 77Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) The Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) is used to define rules for blocks by priority and term that can be assigned to students for registration. Blocks can be selected by the student during registration or can be pre-assigned. When the block selection is required ( Block Selection Required is checked) and the student meets the rule, the student must select a block that is attached to the rule during registration. The block settings also show w hether the student can add or drop courses within the block or can change any courses in registration. When the Allow Change Block indicator is checked, changes can be made . When this indicator is not checked, no changes can be made after block selection or registration. Block settings are displayed for each rule. The Assign Block to Student indicator is used by the SFPSBPA process to assign a student population to blocks until the pre- assignment limit is met. The Add and Drop Course radio group determines if changes can be made by the student in Self-Service for none, some, or all courses, whether block or non-block. When the enrollment requirement exists on SFABLCK, no changes can be made. Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) The Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) is used to maintain pre-assigned blocks for a student by term and study path. The pre-assigned block and associated block rule are displayed. Blocks can be assigned in batch using the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA). You can use a population selection or can select from the process parameters. When a block is manua lly assigned on this page, the Assigned Manually indicator is checked, and no rule is displaye d. The block also shows if a permit-override exists for the block in which the student is currently registered. Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) The Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) is used to define block and course restrictions by term for pre-assigned blo cks during registration. Restrictions are set up to determine whether block registration is available in Self-Service and whether block and course restrictions are in use. When the Available On Self-Service indicator is checked for the term, the Blocks tab is displayed in Self-Service. For manual pre-assignments, block restrictions can be set for whether a student can change from one block to another and if registration overrides can be created. Course restrictions can be set to not allow any adds or drops, only allow adds or drops for non- block courses, or allow adds and drops for any courses. Student Block Selection Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) The Student Block Select ion Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) is used to query on blocks for which students have registered in Self-Service. Queries are by ID, name, term, study path. If a study path is not active, the primary curriculum is displayed. Blocks retrieved can be /n 78Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration manually assigned or assigne d by the Student Pre-Assign ment Process (SFPSBPA). The block rule is displayed when the rules are defined on the Block Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF). Block registration in Self-ServiceThe Class Search and Registration page in Banner Student Self-Service contains a section for block registration. The Blocks tab is used to access the block registration information. See the "Self-Service Registra tion" chapter for page and field details. When a student is logged into Self-Service, has picked a term on the Select a Term Page, and has clicked on the Continue button, the Class Search and Registration Page is displayed. If a record exists on the Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) for the term the student has selected, and the Available on Self-Service indicator is checked, the Blocks tab is displayed and can be accessed. Block selection processWhen the Blocks tab is available but the student is not already registered in the block, the system checks to see if the student is require d to select a block for registration. If the student is required to select a block, no ot her functions can be performed on this page until the block is selected. Block selection is required when: ŁA manual pre-assignment record exists for a student on the Block Student Pre-Assigned Table (SFRBLPA). ŁThe pre-assignment is performed by the Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA), and the associated SFRBRDH rule has the SFRBRDH_MANDATORY_IND column set to Y.When a pre-assignment record does not exis t for the student, the active rules in the SFRBRDH table are evaluated. The record with the highest priority (the lowest priority number) is used. Permission to remove blocksWhen a student is currently registered in a block (a record exists in the SFRBSEL table), and the rule associated with the block does not require a block selection, the student can remove the block if needed. ŁWhen the block assignment record is associated with a rule (the SFRBSEL_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Not Null ), the rule record is retrieved from the SFRBRDH table and checked to see if the student is required to select a block. When the SFRBRDH_MANDATORY_IND column is set to Y, a block selection is required, and the student cannot remove the current block. /n 79Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration ŁWhen the block assignment record is not associated with a rule, (the SFRBSEL_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Null), the student cannot remove the current block due to an existing manual pre-assignment. Permission to change blocksWhen a student has a pre-assignment record for block registration, checks are made to determine whether the student can change blocks. ŁWhen the pre-assignment record is associated with a rule (the SFRBLPA_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Not Null ), the associated rule record is retrieved from the SFRBRDH table and check ed to see if the student can choose from multiple blocks. When the SFRBRDH_BLOCK_RESTRICTION_IND column is set to N, the student cannot change blocks. ŁWhen the pre-assignment record is not associated with a rule (the SFRBLPA_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Null), the pre-assigned block configuration for the term is retrieved from the SFRPABC ta ble and checked to s ee if the student can choose from multiple blocks. When the SFRPABC_BLOCK_RESTRICTION_IND column is set to N, the student cannot change blocks. ŁWhen a student is currently registered in a block (a record exists in the SFRBSEL table), the system checks to see if a drop code exists for use based on the AUTODROP and ADMINDROP GTVSDAX rules. If no single, unique, drop code exists, the student cannot change blocks. A student cannot change blocks when the following is true: ŁThe student is currently registered to a m anually pre-assigned (suggested) block, and the Student May Change Block indicator on SFAPABC is not checked. No other blocks are displayed to the student. ŁThe student is currently registered in an alternative block, and the Allow Change Block indicator for the corresponding rule on SFABRDF is not checked. Examples of dropped and added coursesHere are sample scenarios for dropping and adding courses for blocks and the expected results. Example 1The student is registered in Block A. Block A contains CRNs 1, 2, and 3. The student drops Block A and registers in Bl ock B. Block B contains CRNs 1, 2, and 3. The registration records are not dropped. Th e block is replaced in the SFRSTCR table with Block B, and the SFR BSEL record reflects th e selection of Block B. /n 80Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration Example 2The student is registered in Block A. Block A contains CRNs 1, 2, and 3. The student drops Block A. All CRNs are dropped. The student registers in Block A again. All CRNs in the block are changed back to a status of registered. The student drops Block A again. All CRNs are dropped. The student registers in Block A yet again. All CRNs in the block are changed back to a status of registered. Example 3The student registers in CRN 4. The student drops CRN 4 with a course registration status code of DC. The CRN is not deleted. The student registers in Block A. Block A contains CRNs 1, 2, 3, and 4. CRN 4 is returned to a status of register ed, and the block is updated in the SFRSTCR table. Example 4The student registers in CRN 4. The student drops CRN 4 with a course registration status code of DW. The CRN is deleted. When the student accesses the Block tab, CRN 4 is no longer displayed in the Summary section. The student registers in Block A. Block A contains CRNs 1, 2, 3, and 4. CRN 4 is added back to the Summary with a status of registered, and the block is updated in the SFRSTCR table. Example 5The student registers in CRN 4. The student registers in Block A. Block A contains CRNs 1, 2, and 3. The student drops Block A. Only CRNs 1, 2, and 3 are dropped. Enroll student in a new blockA student can enroll in a new block by performing the following steps. /n 81Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration 1.Select a block using the Select Your Block Option radio group. 2.Click on the Submit button to process the block. Processing continues. 3.The generated transactions are sent through the registration process. 3.1. A student block selection record is created in th e SFRBSEL table. 3.2. The block code and block rule sequence number are updated in the SFRSTCR and SFRSTCA tables. 4.Error checking takes place. 4.1. Courses with fatal errors are rejected and are not added to the student™s schedule. They are processed as if th e student entered the classes manually. 4.2. Courses without fatal errors are passed and are added to the student™s schedule. Remove student from an enrolled blockA student can remove a block in which he/she is enrolled by performing the following steps. 1.Remove the block by selecting the Drop all classes that are part of your current block value in the Select Your Block Option radio group. 2.Click on the Submit button to process the block. Processing continues. 3.The process retrieves the st udent™s SFRBSEL record and determines which drop code to use from the AUTODROP and ADMINDROP GTVSDAX rules. 4.The drop code is assigned to the Action field for each CRN in the fiwork areafl of the page where the block code for the CRN ( SFRSTCR_BLCK_CODE ) is equal to the block selected by the student ( SFRBSEL_BLCK_CODE ).5.The generated transactions are sent through the registration process. 6.Error checking takes place. 6.1. Courses with fatal errors are rejected and are not added to the student™s schedule. They are processed as if th e student entered the classes manually. 6.2. Courses without fatal errors are passed and are added to the student™s schedule. Enroll student in a different blockA student can change a block in which he/she is enrolled by performing the following steps. 1.Select a new or different block using the Select Your Block Option radio group. /n 82Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration 2.Click on the Submit button to process the block. Processing continues. 3.When the selected block is pre-assigned, (the student has a record in the SFRBLPA table for the specific block), and the SFRBLPA_ROVR_CODE column is Not Null, the process creates an SFRSRPO record for each CRN in the block of courses. The permit-override code can then be used to create an override. 4.Each CRN in the block of courses is moved into the fiwork areafl of the page in preparation for registration. 5.The Action field is set to th e code for the GTVSDAX WEBRSTSREG rule. 6.The process retrieves the st udent™s SFRBSEL record and determines which drop code to use from the AUTODROP and ADMINDROP GTVSDAX rules. 7.The drop code is assigned to the Action field for each CRN in the fiwork areafl where the block code for the CRN ( SFRSTCR_BLCK_CODE ) is equal to the block selected by the student ( SFRBSEL_BLCK_CODE ).8.The generated transactions are sent through the registration process. 9.Error checking takes place. 9.1. Courses with fatal errors are rejected and are not added to the student™s schedule. They are processed as if th e student entered the classes manually. 9.2. Courses without fatal errors are passed and are added to the student™s schedule. Action fieldThe Action field in the Summary section of the page only displays the value of None. On the Find Classes and Enter CRNs pages, the value displayed in the Action field depends on course restrictions that ar e set up on SFABRDF or SFAPABC. When the student has a block assignment record in the SF RBSEL table, the following is true:ŁWhen the block assignment record is associated with a rule (the SFRBSEL_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Not Null ), the value of the add and drop course restriction from the block assignment rule (the SFRBRDB_COURSE_RESTRICITON setting) is used to determine the impact on the Action field. ŁWhen the block assignment record is not associated with a rule (the SFRBSEL_BRDH_SEQ_NUM column is Null), the value of the add and drop course restriction from the block assignment rule (the SFRPABC_COURSE_RESTRICITON setting) is used to dete rmine the impact on the Action field.ŁThe course restriction in the SFRBRDB or SFRPABC tables can be set to NR (Without Restriction), NB (Non-Block Only), or NA (Not Allowed). These values are explained below. /n 83Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration Without restrictionChanges can be made without any restrictions, and there is no impact on the Action field for any of the student™s CRNs. Current processing rules are used. Non-block only Changes can be made only to CRNs that are not associated with a block of courses. ŁFor any CRN that is not part of a block (the SFRSTCR_BLCK_CODE is Null ), the Action field is populated according to the current rules. ŁFor any CRN that belongs to the block where the Optional indicator for the CRN (SFRBKOP_OPTIONAL_IND ) is set to Y, the Action field is populated according to the current rules. Otherwise, None is the only value displayed in the Action field. Not allowedChanges cannot be made under any circumstances. For any CRN that belongs to the block where the Optional indicator for the CRN (SFRBKOP_OPTIONAL_IND ) is set to Y, the Action field is populated according to the current rules. Otherwise, None is the only value displayed in the Action field. ReportingThe following process and report are used with block registration. ŁStudent Block Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) ŁIncomplete Block Regist ration Report (SFRIBLR) Note: Reports and processes must be run from job submission in Banner 8.x. See the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook 8.7 for information on parameters and output samples. Student Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) The Student Block Pre-Assignment Process (SFPSBPA) is used to pre-assign a block to a specific student, to multiple students, or to a selected population. Population selection parameters are used to pre-assign a block to more than one student ID at a time. The process uses the primary curriculum and any ac tive study paths. The rules defined in the Block Rules Definition Page (SFABRDF) are used to pre-assign a block to the student. /n 84Banner Student Registration Handbook |Block Registration The pre-assigned block is displayed as Suggested in Banner Student Self-Service Registration. Note: Before the Student Block Pre-A ssignment Process (SFPSBPA) is run, the CRNs must be associated with a block on the Block Schedule Control Page (SFABLCK). Only one block can be pre-assigned to the st udent at a time, using the Student Block Pre- Assignment Process (SFPSBPA). If a student is permit ted to select multiple blocks in Self- Service, based on the rule defined in SFABRDF, then the system identifies the block with fewer pre-assigned students and pre-assigns it to the student. This ensures equal distribution of students to all the available blocks that are associated with the rule. Once the block has been pre-assigned to the stude nt, the Student Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) can be used to verify the assignment. When two block rules apply to a student but th e defined priorities are different, the rule with highest priority (lowest priority number) will be selected for pre-assigning a block to a student. When two rules match exactly and the defined priorities are the same, the first one found is selected for pre-assigning a block to a student. The SFPSBPA process does not require that any permit/override options be checked on the Registration Permit-Overrides Control Page (SFAROVR ). The process will display a message in the .log file when the override code defined on the Pre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) is not defined on SFAROVR or does not have any options checked. The override code on SFAPABC is ignored by the process in this case. When a term is selected for registration, SFPSBPA uses the sp ecific term associated with the rule on SFABRDF instead of using an effe ctive term. The process must use a term that is exact to the rule, not a term that falls withi n a range or comes after a particular term. For example, for term 201610, a rule must exist on SFABRDF for that term. The rule cannot be for a term within a range of 201510 to 201710. The rule cannot be for a term that comes after term 201510. Incomplete Registration Report (SFRIBLR)The Incomplete Block Registration Report (S FRIBLR) is used to retrieve details of students who have not been successfully regist ered for all the CRNs in a registration block. Reporting is performed for the catalog or schedule level. The report output is grouped by the student™s college, level, major, program, and ID. Student type and student class are also reported. A report can be produced for a specific student ID or for a population selection. If a population or single ID is not specified, the report is processed for all the students. Note: When the Report Level parameter is set to C (Catalog), processing does not validate the schedule type for the CRNs/sections. For example, if you have CHEM 1 01 Lecture and CHEM 101 Lab, and only the lecture has been selected for registration, the Catalog report level does not recognize that the lab is missing. The Schedule report level does return the CHEM 101 Lab as missing. /n 85Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Registration PlanningThis chapter details the setup and processing for registration planning. OverviewRegistration planning allows a student, facu lty member, or advisor to build a plan summary that includes courses, class sect ions, and/or degree audit data. The student registration plan is used to assist with future registration for classes. Multiple registration plans can be built by a student, faculty memb er, or advisor within or between terms. Registration plans are typically built by students in advance of the opening of registration at the institution. Registration plans follo w two paths in Banner Student Self-Service. Plans are created in the Plan Ahead path, and students can register from those plans in the Register for Classes path. Plan Ahead path Students can create or edit their registration plans in Banner Student Self-Service. Select the Plan Ahead option on the Registration Landing page to begin registration planning. You are prompted to select a term. You are then taken to the Select a Plan page where you can create a new plan or select an existing plan to edit or delete. When creating a new plan or editing an existing plan, you can search on courses using basic or advanced searches. If a faculty member or advisor has created a plan for the student, those plans are displayed in the Select a Plan and Plan Ahead tabs. When you select a course from the search results, you can add it to the plan at the course level, or you can view sections associated with the course and add the CRN to the plan. You can have a mix of courses and sections in the plan. No restri ction checking takes place when classes are added to the plan su mmary. Restriction checking will occur in the Register for Classes path when classes are added to the registration summary from a plan. Sections and courses added to the plan are displayed in the Summary section of the page. You can also view the schedule or schedule details for the plan as you build it. Once all courses and/or sections have been added to the plan summary, the Save Plan button can be selected. At this time, the plan name is entered. Once the plan has been saved, you can continue to edit the plan, or you can re turn to the Select a Plan page to view the plans for the student. Notes can be applied to a plan or to specific courses or classes. Notes are editable only by the plan creator. Otherwise, notes can be vi ewed by any user who can view those plans. When registration and registration planning are open for the same term, and the student has registered for classes in the same term, the registered classes are displayed in the Plan Ahead path in the plan summary as Information Only with a status of Registered . /n 86Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning No option is available in the Action field. This allows the student to reference classes for which he/she is already registered and view those sections in the Schedule and Schedule Details section of the page. Registered clas ses are always displayed in the plan summary in the Plan Ahead path but are not saved as part of the student registration plan. In the Plan Ahead path, when a student selects a term where the indicator used to look for third party degree audit system plans is checked on SOATERM and Self-Service planning has been set up on SOATERM and SOAREST, Student Educational Plans (SEPs) from Degree Works or other third party degree audit systems can be pushed into Banner in real time. These SEPs can be used to add courses or classes to t he registration plan summary and are displayed in the Plans tab with any other student registration plans. In order for a student to access the Plan Ahead path, the student ID only needs to have an associated general student record (SGBSTDN) and/or student role with a valid login ID and password. Access to this path and to the planning term is not controlled by the effective term range on the general student record. When the student logs in and the needed term is available in the term list (term is open for planning on SOATERM), the student can create plans against that term code, regardless of the effective term on the general student record. Register for Classes path Once a plan has been created by the student, fa culty member, or advisor, it can be used to register for classes. You can select the Register for Classes option on the Registration Landing page, and then enter a term or date range in the Select a Term page. The Plans tab is displayed on the Class Search and Registration page in Banner Student Self- Service. When you select this tab, you can view the courses and sections in the plan, as well as all of the student's registration plan information. Note: Students can register for classes directly from any of their registration plans, as well as from the Class Search Results or other options, such as adding CRNs directly or using block registration. After courses have been added to the plan, you need to select associated sections and add them to the registration summary. Use the View Sections button to display the sections for the course. Selected sections added to registration from the plan are displayed in the registration summary with a Pending status and an action of Registration . (Sections can also be added directly to the registration summary.) You can also use the View Sections button to replace a section or CRN. Once you submit the classes for registration and any restrictions have been resolved, the status of Registered is displayed, and you have completed registration. In the Register for Classes path, when a student selects a term where the indicator used to look for third party degr ee audit system plans is ch ecked on SOATERM and Self- Service planning has been set up on SO ATERM and SOAREST, Student Educational Plans (SEPs) from Degree Works or other thir d party degree audit sys tems can be pushed into Banner in real time. Th ese SEPs can be used to add course s or classes to the plan in the registration plan summary and are displa yed in the Plans tab with any other student registration plans. /n 87Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Third party registration plans Third party registration plans, such as those from Degree Works or other third party degree audit systems, can be interfaced with re gistration planning in Banner Self-Service and used as a reference for creating registration plans. However, third party degree audit system plans (including Degree Works plans) are not editable in the Plan Ahead or Register for Classes paths. They are only a reference from which the Banner registration plans can be created using the Plan Ahead path. In Banner Self-Service planning, processing does not send updates back to an y third party degree audit system or Degree Works plan when changes are made to a Banner student registration plan in the Plan Ahead path. Degree Works plans and third party plans can also be used in the Register for Classes path for performing direct registration. Technical Note: The interface with Degree Works uses JSON returned from a third party degree audit system. When an institution does not have Degree Works, but would like to transfer course or class information into the Plan Ahead and Register for Classes paths, the third party service should follow the JSON format used and understood by registration planning. Degree Works Student Educational Plans (SEPs) are created in the Degree Works Student Planner. The Degree Works SEP plan names are init ially presented on the Select a Plan page to inform the stud ent of their existence. Degree Works SEPs are displayed below existing plans once the check for third party degree audit plans has been completed. Plans are displayed in detail on the Degree Works Plans tab once a student has chosen to create a plan or edit an existing plan. The Degree Works plans cannot be updated, but they can be accessed and used as a reference to build plans via the Plan Ahead path or to register for classe s from the Register for Classes path. When the student uses the Plan Ahead path and selects a term code, he/she is taken to the Select a Plan page. When the student chooses to create a new plan or edit an existing plan, the Find Classes page is displayed. Th e Degree Works Plans tab is also available, and SEPs from Degree Works ar e displayed based on the se ttings on SOATERM for Self- Service planning. The student can continue to create an individual registration plan based on the Degree Works plan, as well as include courses/classes directly from the Find Classes Results. Only courses are presented to the user in a Degree Works plan. Degree Works courses can be added directly to the plan summary using the Add Course button. If class sections are available for planning, the View Sections button can be used to display the sections. You can then select sections and add them to the plan. If a course from the Degree Works SEP is marked as critical, the Critical indicator will be displayed as checked in the Degree Works Plan tab. This tells the student the cour se needs to be taken, or he/she could be off track with degree requirements. Notes entered in the SEP for the Degree Works plan are also displayed in Banner Student Self-Service and are view only. You may choose to turn off registration plann ing in the Plan Ahead path. In this mode, student cannot create plans. However you can still allow st udents to register from Degree Works SEPs or other third part y degree audit system plans in the Register for Classes path. In the Register for Classes path, th e student must view and select sections associated with the courses listed in the Degree Works plans in order to register for classes using the registration summary. /n 88Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Faculty member and advisor plan accessPlan access for faculty members and advisors differs based on the Plan Ahead path and the Register for Classes path. Plan Ahead path and SEPs Access to the Plan Ahead path in Self-Ser vice for faculty members or advisors is controlled by process rules on the Faculty/Advisor Proc ess Rules Page (SOAFACS). If your institution interfaces with Degree Works, you should consider setting up security on SOAFACS for faculty members or advisors that reflects Degr ee Works security. See the fiFaculty security - Plan Ahead pathfl topic in this section for more information on setting up faculty security rules for registration planning. When the faculty member or advisor clears security associated with the student and is authorized to create student plans in the Pl an Ahead path, the exis ting student SEPs are displayed in the same manner that they are presented to the student. SOATERM rules determine the display of the Degree Works SEPs in the Plan Ahead path based on the settings of the Term open for Self-Service Planning and the Check third party degree audit system plans indicators. Register for Classes path Access to the Register for Cl asses path by faculty members or advisors requires the entry of the student password in order to register students for classes. Once the password has been entered successfully, the faculty member or advisor is presented with the same user interface as the student. Any registration plans created in the Plan Ahead path are displayed in the Plans tab. Degree Works SEPs that exist for that student are also displayed in the Plans tab when both the Check third party degree audit system plans and the Display third party degree audit system plans in registration indicators are checked on SOATERM. Faculty member or advisor created plans - Plan Ahead path In the Plan Ahead path, any combination of student-created plans and faculty member or advisor-created plans is displayed in the Select a Plan tab. Degree Works plans are also displayed when the interface is in use. Facu lty members or advisors can use the Select a Plan tab to create a new plan for a student or view and edit plans they have already created for students. They can create new plans in the same manner as students, using the class search or Degree Works SEPs. They can create up to the maximum number of plans specified on SOATERM. Students can view the plans created by the faculty member or advisor in the Plan Ahead path or the Register for Classes path. The faculty member or advisor must have ac cess to the student ID based on faculty security rules. When the facult y member or advisor logs in with a student ID, he/she can approve or unapprove any student-created pl ans or plans he/she has created for the student. However, faculty members and adviso rs cannot mark any plan created by a /n 89Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning student as preferred. Also, faculty members and advisors cannot edit or delete plans created by a student, and they cannot edit or delete any plans they did not create. A student may not edit or delete any plan a faculty member or advisor has created. Whether plans have been created by advisors, faculty members, or students, only the plan creator is allowed to modify the plan he/she has created. For example, when a student logs in and sees a plan created by an advisor, the student may not agree with all of the advisor's suggested courses/sections and want to modify the plan. However, the student cannot modify that particular plan. See the topics that follow later in this chapter for more information on fiApproved Plansfl, fiPreferred Plansfl, and fiMaximum number of plansfl. Faculty security - Plan Ahead path This section discusses the PLANAHEAD , DISPLAYSCHEDULE , and CHECKORDER rules on the Process Control Code Validat ion Page (STVPROC) and the Faculty/Advisor Process Rules Page (SOAFACS). Existing Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-Service 8.x security processing has been incorporated into the Plan Ahead path. The setup and overall functionality for the PLANAHEAD process has been included with Banner 9.x. Please refer to the fiOverviewfl chapter in the Banner Faculty and Advisor Self-Service User Guide or the fiFaculty Loadfl chapter in the Banner Student User Guide for more information on the setup and use of faculty security rules. The following STVPROC seed data is delivered for use with faculty securi ty in registration planning. PLANAHEAD rule Faculty security is executed for the FACULTY , ADVISOR , and FACULTY AND ADV ISOR persona type codes in the Plan Ahead path in Self-Service. When a faculty member or advisor chooses the Plan Ahead path, the rules defined on SOAFACS for the PLANAHEAD process are followed. The logic associated with the PLANAHEAD process rules drives access to the Plan Ahead path only. When the faculty member or adv isor enters the student ID and passes security, they can access the Select a Plan page where they can create plans for the stude nt or edit and/or delete plans they have created for the studen t. The student™s schedule, schedule details, and registration information (classes registered in the term selected from the Register for Classes path) are also available for reference. The registration information is displayed when a registration record exists for the student in the term selected for use with ProcessDescriptionCheck Order Enforce Check Order PIN Control AllowedSystem RequiredPLANAHEADRegistration Planning AdvisorNoYesYes /n 90Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning registration planning. Registration and sch edule information displayed in the plan summary is view only, and cannot be changed in the Plan Ahead path. The following SOAFACS seed data is delivered fo r use with faculty securi ty in registration planning. DISPLAYSCHEDULE rule The DISPLAYSCHEDULE process rules on SOAFACS are not checked for registration planning in Self-Service and are not related to the Plan Ahead path. Access to the Plan Ahead path, which includes the student™s schedule, schedule details, and current registration information is controlled by the PLANAHEAD process. The DISPLAYSCHEDULE process has not changed and is st ill used for the existing Banner Faculty and Advisor 8.x Self-Services pages. CHECKORDER ruleThe CHECKORDER rule on STVPROC is used with the PLANAHEAD process on SOAFACS when an ID is defined as being both a faculty member and an advisor on the Faculty/Advisor Information Page (SIAINST). When an ID is defined as both advising and instructing, or when the ID is defined as both not advising or instructing, the CHECKORDER rule is necessary to id entify which SOAFACS rule is used, the faculty rule or the advisor rule. The CHECKORDER process for 9.x Self-Service func tions in the same manner as in Banner 8.x Self-Service. Please refer to the Banner 8.x documentation listed above for more information about faculty and advisor security. When a user ID is defined as both a faculty member and an advisor on SIAINST (multiple personas exist), the user can ch oose the persona for the session ( Faculty, Advisor , or Faculty and Advisor ) on the Persona Selection page when logging in. When a user with a persona of Faculty and Advisor selects either the single Faculty or single Advisor persona, the CHECKORDER rule is still used for that login ID. The system considers the user to have both personas based on the SIAINST record, and security is processed accordingly. While the definition of the faculty member or advisor from SIAINST is still consider ed for security purposes, the persona selection chosen during login is used for the column or page display configuration on SOAWSCR. ProcessDesc Check Order Process Available on Self- ServiceAll Access PIN ControlRelation shipPrimary Attribute Type Checking Sys Req PLANAHEADRegistration Planning AdvisorYesYesNoNoNoNoYes PLANAHEADRegistration Planning FacultyNoYesNoNoNoNoYes /n 91Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Plans created by othersIn the Plan Ahead path, a user can view plans created by users who are different from the login ID user. These plans are displayed in the Created by Others tab and can be used to add courses and/or sections to a student™s plan in the registration plan summary. Plans created by other users may not be modified, but these plans can be viewed and used to assist with building or editing additional plans. A student has the option to create a new plan or edit an existing plan by accessing the Plan Ahead tab, selecting the Created by Others tab, and viewing plans such as an advisor-created plan. The student can then se lect courses/sections from the advisor- created plan and any other plans listed in the Created by Others tab to create a new plan. The student can use the Add button to select specific courses/sections or the Add All button to select all the courses/sections from plans that were created by other users. The student can also add more courses to the new plan by searching for additional classes using Find Classes. This processing is not dependent on the persona of the login user. Any plans created by a user who is not the login user are displa yed in the Created by Others tab. Choosing Add or Add All for courses in plans in this tab works the same way for various personas. When open learning sections are added from t he Created by Others tab, the user is not prompted to enter begin and end dates. The dates are defaulted from the original plan and can be viewed in the Schedule Details section of the page. If the defaulted dates are not acceptable, the section can be removed from the plan, and a search can be performed using Find Classes to add an open learni ng class with preferred begin and end dates. Using Add AllThe Add All button on the Created by Others tab is used to add all courses and/or sections in a plan to the plan summary. Re striction checking does not occur, so if Add All is selected multiple ti mes, the same sections and courses will be added to the plan again. When an open learning class is added to the plan summary using Add All, the existing begin and end dates for the class are defaulted from the original plan and are not changed. The dates can be modified if the student decides to register for the open learning class in the Register for Classes path. Note: The option to Add All is not available from the Degree Works tab since course ranges and courses with wildcards may be displayed. Add All path comparison Here is a comparison of using Add All in two registration paths: the Plan Ahead path with the Created by Others tab and the Register for Classes path with the Plans tab. Plan Ahead path, Creat ed by Others tab, Add All to the plan summaryŁNo restriction checking takes place. ŁNo option is available to select open learning begin and end dates. /n 92Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning ŁClass sections and courses are added to a plan summary. Register for Classes path, Plans tab, Add All to the registration summaryŁRestriction checking takes place. ŁAn option is available to select or change open learning begin and end dates. ŁOnly class sections can be added to the registration summary. Open learning sections and plansOpen learning course sections can be added to registration plans in the Plan Ahead path. However, the student may already be registered in the same open learning section prior to the creation of the plan, and that course would already have established begin and end dates. It does not matter whether new begin and end dates are entered for the plan or if Not Now is selected from the prompt to skip date entry when the class is selected. The begin and end dates from the registered section are defaulted into the plan summary. This occurs when the class is added individually from the Find Classes search or is selected on the Created by Others tab using the Add or Add All buttons. If the student accesses planning and creates or edits a plan, and adds the same open learning section to the plan that is already in registration, any modified begin and end dates that are entered are ignored, and the original dates are defaulted in from the registration record. This occurs regardless of the persona of the user who is creating the plan for the student, and is consistent no matter how the student adds the open learning section to the plan (via the Find Classes search or the Created by Others tab). If the open learning section selected for the plan has not been previously added to registration for the student, the begin and end dates can be entered or skipped. They are saved in the plan when the class is selected from Find Classes search or are defaulted into the plan when the section is listed in a plan in the Created by Others tab. The begin and end dates can be viewed in the Schedule De tails section of the page in the Register for Classes path and the Plan Ahead path. ŁWhen registration does not exist for the open learning section, and the student does not want to use the faculty/adviso r dates defaulted in from the Created by Others tab, the student can do the following. ŁRemove the section from the plan. ŁPerform a search using Find Classes. ŁAdd the section. ŁChoose new begin and end dates. ŁWhen registration does exist for the open learning sect ion, and the student does not want to use the faculty/adviso r dates defaulted in from the Created by Others tab, the student needs to do the following. ŁAccess the Register for Classes path. /n 93Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning ŁDrop the registered open learning section. ŁReturn to the Plan Ahead path. ŁChoose the registration plan. ŁPerform a search using Find Classes. ŁAdd the section. ŁChoose new begin and end dates. Maximum number of plansYou can define the maximum number of plans for an ID and term in the Maximum plans for term field on SOATERM. In the Plan Ahead path , the number of existing plans and the maximum number of allowed plans are displayed to the user. Once the maximum number of plans has been reached for a plan creator, no more plans can be created by that student, faculty member, or advisor. The Create a new plan button on the Select a Plan page is no longer enabled when the maximum is reached. However, existing plans can be edited if needed. The maximum number of plans applies to the user who is creating the plans. It is not the total of plans from combined users or plan creators. For example, if the Maximum plans for term field is set to 5 for the term, then the student, faculty member, or advisor can each create five plans. For example, when the Maximum plans for term field is set to 5:ŁThe student can create 5 plans. ŁAdvisor 1 can create 5 plans. ŁAdvisor 2 can create 5 plans ŁFaculty member 1 can create 5 plans. ŁFaculty member 2 can create 5 plans, and so on. Adding notes to a registration planIn the Plan Ahead path, custom notes can be added at the plan name level and/or at the course or section level in the plan summary. Once notes are applied and the plan is saved, a check mark indicates that a note exists. On ly notes in the plan summary can be edited. Notes displayed in other locations are display only. ŁOnly the login ID user can create or edit his/her own notes in the plan summary. ŁNotes added by students are display only for faculty members and advisors and cannot be updated. ŁNotes added by faculty members and advisors are display only for students and cannot be updated. /n 94Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning ŁPlan notes on the Plans tab in the Register for Classes path are display only, regardless of the login ID user. Study paths and plans Study paths can be selected when they are set up to display for the term. In the Plan Ahead path, when the student selects a study path on the Select a Term page, only plans associated with that study path are displayed on the Select a Plan page. If a study path is not selected on the Select a Term page, plans associated with study paths are not displayed on the Select a Plan page. Plans that are associated with study paths are presented independently and displayed with the selected study path. For example: ŁIf term 203610 and study path 1 are selected upon entry to the Plan Ahead path, only student registration plans with study path 1 are presented. The new student plans that are created will be associated with term 203610 and study path 1. ŁIf term 203610 and study path 2 are selected upon entry to the Plan Ahead path, only student registration plans with study path 2 are presented. The new student plans that are created will be associated with term 203610 and study path 2. ŁIf term 203610 is selected without a study path upon entry to the Plan Ahead path, only student registration plans with no associ ated study paths are presented. The new student plans that are created will be associated with te rm 203610 and no study path. All student-created registration plans are counted against the maximum number of plans allowed on SOATERM, regardless of the se lected study path. Degree Works plans are displayed in the Degree Works Plans tab, regardless of whether a study path has been selected. Study paths are not required in the Plan Ahead path. No error is displayed when a student has a study path and does not select it in this path. Study paths are required in the Register for Classes path when the Study Path Required indicator is checked on SOATERM. If a study path is chosen, only those student registration plans with the associated study path will be displayed as av ailable for registration in the Plans tab. Degree Works plans will be displayed in the Pl ans tab, regardless of whether study paths exist. Approved plansFaculty members and advisors can approve or unapprove plans they have created for a student, as well as approve or unapprove student -created plans. Mult iple faculty members can approve or unapprove the same student plan if they have access to that student™s planning information. Students cannot approve plans and are not required to register from an approved plan. When an approved plan or plans exist, the student can still register from any other plan in the Plans tab in the Re gister for Classes path. The use of approved plans is optional. To use approved plans, configure the ADVISORAPPROVEDPLAN field item on SOAWSCR for the appropriate persona, page, and effective term to activate the use of the /n 95Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning "Approvedfl notation. fiApprovedfl is displayed on plans in the Plan Ahead path and the Register for Classes path. It is al so displayed in the plan summary. The fiApprovedfl value is display only. It is not tied to any logic or functionality . Plans that have not been approved display the Approve This Plan link. You can click on the link and approve any plans. The persona and name of the approver are displayed with the plan. Approved plans display the Remove Approval link. The faculty member or advisor can click on the link to unapprove the plan. Only faculty members or advisors can use the Approve This Plan or Remove Approval links. The field items for the Approve This Plan or Remove Approval links can be configured on SOAWSCR to be displayed or not be displayed, and the descriptions can be modified. The display position setting on SOAWSCR is no t used. The field items are always located in the same position on any page where they are displayed. Preferred plansStudents have the option to choose one prefer red plan from plans they have created. Only one plan can be designated as preferred at any time. When in the Register for Classes path, a student can select any plan in his/ her plan list for registration. The student™s preferred plan is displayed at the top of the list of registration plans. However, the student is not required to register from a preferred plan. The use of preferred plans is optional. Students cannot make a plan preferred when t hat plan was created for them by faculty members and advisors. Faculty members and advisors cannot make a student-created plan a preferred plan. A Degree Works pl an cannot be designated as preferred. When three or more plans exist, and the preferred plan is deleted, the user receives a message that another plan sh ould be selected to be the preferred plan. The user can select a new preferred plan, and then the former preferred plan can be deleted. When a student has two plans and one is deleted, the remaining plan automatically becomes the preferred plan. Configure the display of the PREFERREDPLAN field item on SOAWSCR for a persona, page, and term to activate the use of the fi My Preferred Plan fl notation. The field can be configured to be displayed or not be displayed, and the description can be modified. The display position setting on SOAWSCR is not us ed. The field items are always located in the same position on any page where they are displayed. The fiMy Preferred Planfl value is display only. It is not tied to any logic or functionality. Note: Faculty members and advisors cann ot modify the setting for the PREFERREDPLAN field item on SOAWSCR. The notation of fi My Preferred Plan fl is displayed for plans in the Plan Ahead path and the Register for Classes path. Only one student plan displays the fi My Preferred Plan fl notation. The remaining student plans display the Make preferred link. The student can click on the link and make another plan the pr eferred plan. The new preferred plan is then moved to the top of the list of plans. fi My Preferred Plan fl is also displayed in the plan summary. Important Note: When a student creates one plan for a term, that plan is automatically identified as the preferred plan by default. If you have students who created registration /n 96Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning plans in the Banner Student Registration 9.0 Controlled Release 1, an optional script is provided that can be run after Banner Student Regi stration 9.2 is installe d. This script sets a student plan as preferred. Refer to t he topic fiUpdate preferred plans that were previously created in release 9.0 CR1fl in this section fo r more information. Study paths and preferred plansWhen a student has a registration plan with an associated study path, he/she needs to decide whether that plan should be the preferred plan. Only one registration plan can be the preferred plan, even if plans with study paths exist. When only two plans have been created by the student and the preferred plan is deleted, the remaining plan is marked as preferred by default, even if the remaining plan is not displayed. This could be the case if the student had one non-study path plan and one study path plan. Note: It is not recommended that an institution change study path access during a term. This could prevent a student from accessing the plans associated with the study path. In the Plan Ahead path, when plans with stud y paths exist for the st udent, and the student does not choose a study path, plans with study paths are not displayed for selection as the new preferred plan. To select the preferred plan in this case, the student needs to do the following: ŁExit from the Select a Plan page. ŁGo back to the Select a Term page. ŁChoose a different path (study path or no study path). ŁSelect a preferred plan. ŁThe student can then return to the original path and delete the plan that is no longer needed. Personas and planningHere are some basics for what a user with the FACULTY and/or ADVISOR persona type code can do in registration planning. The logi n user ID is associated with the persona. So each time fiuserfl is mentioned below, it applie s to the login user ID associated with the persona. ŁAny user with a persona type code of FACULTY and/or ADVISOR that logs into planning with a selected student ID (password) can continue with registration planning and do the following. ŁView any plans for that student, regardless of who created the plans for that student. ŁApprove plans created by that student. ŁCreate a plan for that student and then approve the plan. /n 97Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning However, this user cannot approve plans created by different users with a persona type code of FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR .ŁOnly users with a persona type code of STUDENT can make a registration plan the preferred plan. Users with a persona type code of FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR cannot make a plan the preferred plan. ŁOnly users with a persona type code of FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR can approve registration plans. Users with a persona type code of STUDENT cannot approve plans. ŁNo plans can be edited by any other user, rega rdless of persona. The exception is the option for the FACULTY, ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR persona type codes to approve student-created plans. See the fiUsing Personasfl topic in the "Registration Setup and Use" chapter for more information on persona types, Web Tailor role mappings, persona assignments, processing flow, faculty security, and Re gistration Landing page configuration. Plan access for the Registrar persona Plans presented to the user with the REGISTRAR persona provide the same user experience as those presented for a student or faculty member and/or advisor. When planning is open for the term, and plans are set up to display in Self-Service Registration, the Plans tab is displayed for the Registrar persona in the Register for Classes path. Existing registration plans created by the student are displayed in this path, as are any registration plans created for the student by faculty members and/or advisors. The persona and name of the plan creator are di splayed, as well as the student™s preferred plan and any faculty member or advisor approved plans. When third party degree audit system plans are set up to display and the Degree Works interface is active, SEPs from Degree Works are displayed if they exist for the student. No data in the Plans tab can be edited, but any notes associated with a plan can be viewed. A user with the REGISTRAR persona does not have access to the Plan Ahead option on the landing page and cannot create student registration plans in the Plan Ahead path. However, this user can access the Register for Classes path and add classes directly to the registration summary for a student using the Class Search and Registration page, the Enter CRNs tab, the Plans tab, or th e Blocks tab (if it is available). It is suggested that the Plan Ahead option be removed for the REGISTRAR persona. This can be performed on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) for the following data items: ŁPersona - value of REGISTRAR (Registrar) ŁPage - value of 1000 (Landing Page) ŁField - value of LANDINGPLANAHEAD ŁEffective Term - value that is appropriate /n 98Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Plan display orderStudent registration plans are displayed in th e following order whether the user is in the Plan Ahead path or the Register for Classes path. 1.Student™s preferred plan 2.Student™s approved plans by sequence number in ascending order 3.Student™s non-approved plans by sequence number in ascending order In the Select a Plan tab in the Plan Ahead path, the student can des ignate one of plans he/she has created as the preferred plan and thus set the display hierarchy. When a student designates a different plan as the pr eferred plan, a message is displayed in the Notification Center that the plan has bee n made the preferred plan. The new preferred plan is always displayed first. Also in the Select a Plan tab in the Plan Ahead path, faculty members and advisors can designate which plans are approved or unapproved, which also affects the hierarchy. The approval or unapproval includes student-created plans and faculty member or advisor- created plans. When a faculty member or advisor approves a plan, a message is displayed in the Notification Center that the plan approval has been updated, and the plans are reordered appropriately. Update plans created in re lease 9.0 CR1 as preferred plansThe following information should be reviewed by Development Partners or institutions who installed release 9.0 CR1 with the option for students to create registration plans in the Plan Ahead path and who did not migrate to release 9.1 CR2.The information below is not applicable to Development Partners or institutions who have installed and are using release 9.1 CR2 or who will be new to Banner Student Registration with the installation of release 9.2. Registration plans created using the Banner Student Registration 9.0 CR1 release were created before the preferred plan functionalit y was available. With the delivery of Banner Student Registration 9.1 CR2, students must always have one plan designated as preferred .The sfbplanu_080605.sql script is used to update plans created from the 9.0 CR1 release to be preferred plans when students have multiple plans. This is an optional script. This script must be run manually. It is not part of the upgrade. It evaluates all existing student plans from the 9.0 CR1 release, updates the student™s plan with the most recent date and the highest sequence number within the term to be the fiPreferredfl plan. All other plans are marked as fiNot Preferredfl. Warning! If the script is run against plans that were created after release 9.1 CR2 has been installed, existing preferred plans could be incorrectly changed. /n 99Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Warning! If the script is not run, and the 9.1 CR 2 release is installed, all existing student plans will be set to fiPreferredfl. Once this occurs, the student cannot change an existing plan to be fiNot Preferredfl. If you choose not to run the script that will identify a single plan as preferred, have students do the following to reset their plans and return to having a single plan be the preferred plan. 1.Log in to the Plan Ahead path. 2. Create a new registration plan. If the maximum number of plans has been reached, a plan must be deleted. 3.Save the plan. 4.Access the Select a Plan tab. 5.Set the new plan as the preferred plan. The rest of the plans for the student will be refreshed automatica lly and marked as not preferred. 6.Standard functionality can now be followed to mark plans as preferred. ProcessingThis section contains information about setting up and using registration plans. Use the following tabs in Banner Student Self-Service for planning. ŁPlans tab on the Class Search and Registration page. ŁDegree Works Plan tab on the Plan Ahead page. ŁCreated by Others tab on the Plan Ahead page. See the "Self-Service Registration" chapter for page and field detail. The following Banner Student 9.x administ rative pages are used with registration planning: ŁExternal API Information Validation Page (STVREST) ŁExternal API Connection Information Page (SOAREST) ŁThe Term Control Page (SOATERM) ŁOverall Page And Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) The following tables are used specifically wit h Banner Student 9.x r egistration planning: ŁRegistration Plan Base Table (SFBPLAN) ŁRegistration Plan Repeating Course Table (SFRPLAN) /n 100 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning ŁRestful API Connection Information Table (SOBREST) ŁRestful API Integration Codes Validation Table (STVREST) Planning path Here is a sample path for getting started and navigating through registration planning. To create a new plan or wo rk with an existing plan1.Select Plan Ahead from the Registration Landing page. 1.1. Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. Terms that are open for planning are listed. Study paths can be selected at this point if they are available. 1.2. Use the Select a Plan page to edit or delete an existing plan or create a new plan. The maximum number of available student registration plans allowed for the term is displayed. A message is displa yed when the student has reached that threshold. While plans may not be create d in excess of the maximum, existing plans can be edited or deleted. A message is also presented to indicate whether the plan will be associated with a study path , similar to the Re gister for Classes path. When a study path has been selected, only plans associated with the selected study path are displayed or can be created. When no study path has been selected, new or existing plans that are displayed are not related to study paths. All combinations of plans are counted against the maximum number of plans allowed. But all plans may not be visible if a combination of plans has been created with and/or without study paths. 1.3. To create a new plan, click on the Create New Plan button, and use the Plan Ahead - Find Classes tab to search for courses. 1.4. Use the Plan Ahead - Find Classes and Find Classes Results to add courses to the plan, view sections for a course, and add those sections to the plan as needed. Courses and/or sections can be added to a registration plan. However, sections need to be made available in planning on SOATERM. 1.5. View the schedule, schedule details, and summary information for the selected courses and sections. Courses or sections have a status of Pending in the Summary section of the page until the plan is saved. Notes can be added to the plan at this point. 1.6. Save the plan. 1.7. Enter the plan name in the Name your Plan window and save. /n 101 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Plans can be saved and set aside until you are ready to use them to register for classes in the Register for Classes path. Courses and sections in the Summary section of the page now have a status of Planned .Notes can also be added or modified at this point. Any notes updated prior to saving the plan are displayed with a check mark. 2.Return to the Registration Landing page and select Plan Ahead. 2.1. Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. Use the Plans - Select a Plan page to work with an existing plan. Available options include creating a new plan (if the maximum number of plans has not been reached) and preferring or approving plans. Student registration plans are displayed in the Plans tab based on the Self- Service Planning settings on SOATERM and the configuration on SOAREST. 2.2. Use the Edit and Delete buttons to change course selections in an existing plan or delete plans as needed. 2.3. Save the edited plan. Plans can be saved and set aside until you are ready to use them to register for classes in the Register for Classes path. Once the plan has been saved, courses and sections in the Summary section of the page have a status of Planned .To register from a plan 3.Return to the Registration Landing p age and select Register for Classes. 3.1. Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. 3.2. Select a study path if one is needed and study paths are available. 3.3. Use Register for Classes to access registration plans. 3.4. Use the Plans - Register from a Plan page to select sections from student registration plans or Degree Works plans if they are available. A combination of classes and/ or courses can exist in st udent registration plans. Only courses are always di splayed in Degree Works pl ans. Only classes or sections may be added to the registration summary. When a study plan is selected in the Register for Classes path, only student registration plans associated with that study path are displayed in the Plans tab. Degree Works plans are displayed, regardless of the selected study path. 3.5. Add courses and/or sections to the plan. ŒWhen only courses are listed in a plan, view sections and add them to the registration summary, and then use the Return to Plan button to continue working in the Plans tab. ŒWhen only sections are listed in a plan, add a section to the registration summary. If the student has decided to select a different section, view sections and add the replacement se ction to the registration summary. /n 102 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning There is no restriction to register for classes from the Plans tab. Use the Find Classes tab to search for and add sections to the registration summary. You may also access the Enter CRNs tab to ad d CRNs directly or access the Blocks tab for block registration, if either of th ose tabs is available in the Register for Classes path. 3.6. Use the Submit button to register for the all of the classes in the registration summary. Saved classes in the Su mmary section of the p age have a status of Registered .To use Degree Works plans 4.Create a registration plan using Degree Works plans. Degree Works plans can be used in two ways. Choose how you want to create the plan. ŁIn the Plan Ahead path, a Degree Works SEP can be used to create a student registration plan in the plan summary. ŁIn the Register for Classes path, you can register directly from a Degree Works SEP. 5.When using Degree Works plans to create a registration plan, access the Registration Landing page and select Plan Ahead. 5.1. Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. 5.2. Use the Select a Plan page to edit or dele te an existing student registration plan or to create a new plan. When the appropriate setup and configuration have been performed on SOAREST and SOATERM, the Degree Works Plans tab is displayed on the Plan Ahead page. 5.3. Use the Degree Work s Plans tab to access Degree Works SEPs and create or edit the student registration plan in the Summary section of the page. The number of available SEP plans fr om Degree Works for the term is displayed. A message is displayed if no plans are available. 5.4. View the Degree Works plans and any associated notes. Plans and notes from Degree Works are view only and cannot be modified. 5.5. Use the Add Course button to add Degree Works courses to the student registration plan. 5.6. View sections associated with courses listed in the Degree Works plans and add the sections to the student registration plan. Degree Works plans consist only of courses, so if sections have been made available in the planning term on SO ATERM, you can view sections for the courses and add them to the registration plan in the Summary section of the page. 5.7. Save the plan. /n 103 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning 5.8. Continue as in step 3 above for Register for Classes to display and register for classes directly from Degree Works plans. Degree Works plans consist only of co urses, so you always need to view sections from a Degree Works course and add the associated section to the registration summary. Set up Degree Works Refer to the Degree Works Installation Guide for information on setting up Degree Works for use with Banner registration planning. This should be done before setting up SOAREST as described in step 3 below in the fiSet up registration planningfl topic. Note: The minimum version of Degree Works that should be used to bring SEPs into registration planning is Degree Works 4.1.3. There are two main tasks to complete in Degree Works. 1.Identify the URL to be used on SOAREST for the Degree Works component. 2.Define the role of RSPLAN to be used with the username and password on SOAREST. See step 3 below under fiSet up registrati on planningfl for more information on the URL format.Set up registration planningDo the following to set controls for student registration planning. 1.On the Term Control Page (SOATERM), ve rify the settings fo r the following Self- Service Planning indicators. 1.1. Set the Term open for Self-Service Planning indicator to checked or Y, to turn on registration planning for the term. This makes the term available on the Select a Term page. 1.2. Enter the number of plans allowed per user login ID for the planning term in the Maximum plans for term field.When planning is activated for the term, the value must be between 1 - 999 and cannot be 0.This field will always allow a valid va lue. If the value had been set to 5 and was then later changed to 1, a student who had created five plans could continue to edit those plans. Students with more than one plan would not be allowed to create new plans. 1.3. Set the Display Self-Service plans in registration indicator to checked or Y, to display student registration plans in the Register for Classes path and allow students to add sections to the registration summary. /n 104 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning 1.4. Set the Allow adding course sections to plan indicator to checked or Y, to allow the student to add class sections to a student registration plan in the Plan Ahead path. When this indicator is unchecked, only courses can be added to the student registration plan. This option can be used when class sections for the term are not yet ready at the time students be gin building their registration plans. For third party plans, additional settings on SOATERM are used. 1.5. Set the Check third party degree audit system plans indicator to checked or Y, to tell the system to look for third party registration plans that can be used in Self-Service. When checked, the system checks for third party data based on settings defined on STVREST and SOAREST. See steps 2 and 3 below. 1.6. Set the Display third party degree audit system plans in registration indicator to checked or Y, to display third party registration plans in the Register for Classes path on the Plans tab. Students can view sections for Degree Works plan courses and add the sections to the registration summary. For more details on these controls, see the "Term Control Page (SOATERM)" section under the "Administrative Pages" t opic at the end of this chapter. 2.Ensure that codes used for registration planning and Degree Works (or other third party systems) exist on the External AP I Information Validation Page (STVREST). The system required code of RPL, Registration Planning , is delivered. 3.Set up server connections for third party degree audit systems on the External API Connection Page (SOAREST). 3.1. Enter a code of RPL for Registration Planning. 3.2. Enter the username, password, URL, and timeout information for the connection. Enter the following for the URL: serverURL:serverPort/DWPath/api/plans For example: Œhttp://myDWServer1.uni.com:8080/dwservice/planner/ api/plans Œhttp://myDWServer2.uni.com:8080/myservice/ dwplannerservice/planner/api/plans Timeout data is entered in seconds. A setting of 0 or Null is equal to no timeout.4.On the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR), define the persona, page, and effective term field configurations for registration planning. /n 105 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning Disable planning but allow students to register from third party plans Institutions may choose to prevent students fr om creating registration plans in the Plan Ahead path, but still allow students to access third party degree a udit system plans for registration in the Register for Classes path. Use the following steps to modify your registra tion planning setup to only allow students to register from de gree audit third party pl ans or SEPs from Degree Works. When these steps are performed, students cannot create new registration plans in the Plan Ahead path. 1.Set the Term open for Self-Service Planning indicator to checked or N, to turn off registration planning for the term. The term is not available on the Select a Term page. Only terms open for planning are available for selection on the Select a Term page in the Plan Ahead path. 2.Review the setting for the Display Self-Service plans in registration indicator. If at some point the selected term was open for planning and students created registration plans for that term, the plan s would be displayed in the Register for Classes path when this in dicator is checked or Y. If the requirement is to only display third party plans in registration, this indicator should be unchecked or N.3.Set the Check third party degree audit system plans indicator to checked or Y, to tell the system to look for third party regi stration plans that can be used in Self- Service.When checked, the system c hecks for third party data based on settings defined on STVREST and SOAREST. 4.Set the Display third party degree audit system plans in registration indicator to checked or Y, to display third party registration plans in the Register for Classes path in the Plans tab. In the Register for Classes path, students can view courses from Degree Works plans and then view and add the sections to the registration summary. Administrative pages The following administrative pages are used with this functionality. Refer to the Banner Student 9.x Online Help for additional page information and field descriptions. External API Information Validation Page (STVREST) The External API Information Validation Page (STVREST) is used to create and maintain codes for external APIs used to connect with third party products. This page should be set up and monitored by technical administrators. A system-required code of RPL has been delivered for use with registration planning and connections to Degree Works. /n 106 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning External API Connection Information Page (SOAREST)The External API Connection Information Page (SOAREST) is used to create and maintain external API codes, server connec tions, and login data used with third party products that need to connect with Banner Self-Service. This page should be set up and monitored by technical administrators. This page can be used with registration planning to allow Banner Self-Service to connect with third party degree audit systems such as Degree Works. The Degree Works Student Educational Plan (SEP) informa tion or other third party de gree audit system plans are displayed in Banner Student Self-Service. External API codes for registration planning must exist on the External API In formation Validation Page (STVREST). Term Control Page (SOATERM) Use the Self-Service Planning section of this page to define controls for registration planning in the Plan Ahead path and the Register for Classes path in Self-Service. Self-Service PlanningUse this section of the Term Information to vi ew and set up the registration plan controls for Self-Service. Controls are: ŁTerm open for Self-Service planning ŁMaximum plans for termŁDisplay Self-Service plans in registration ŁAllow adding course sections to plan ŁCheck third party degree audit system plans ŁDisplay third party degree audit system plans in registration You can update the indicators and save the changes. If you check and then later uncheck the Term open for Self-Service planning indicator to close the term for registration planning, other Self-Service planning settings remain upda ted and will be ch ecked by the system and processed accordingly. For example, if the Term open for Self-Service planning indicator is unchecked for the term, but the Check third party degree audit system plans indicator is checked, and the Display third party degree audit system plans in registration indicator is checked, planning in the Plan Ahead path will not be available for the term. However the degree audit system plans would continue to be displa yed and be available for registration in the Register for Classes path in the Plans tab. Also, if the term is closed for planning but the Display Self-Service plans in registration indicator is checked, any student registrati on plans that had been created prior to the close of planning will be displayed in the Re gister for Classes path in the Plans tab. Here are the details for the registration plan controls. /n 107 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Registration Planning FieldsDescriptions Term open for Self-Service planning Check box used to indicate whether the term is available to create or edit student registration plans in Self-Service. When checked, this makes the term code available from the Select a Term page in the Plan Ahead path. Maximum plans for term Maximum number of registration pl ans that can be created per login ID for the term. When the Term Open for Self-Service planning indicator is checked, the valid range is 1 - 999. You must select a value between 1 and 999 to save the record. When the Term Open for Self-Service planning indicator is not checked, the value can be 0.Display Self-Service plans in registration Check box used to indicate whether student registration plans are displayed in the Register for Cla sses path, so students can add sections from their plans to the registration summary. When this indicator is checked, the Plans tab is displayed in Self- Service.Allow adding course sections to plan Check box used to indicate w hether the student can add class sections to a registration plan in the Plan Ahead path. When checked, sections can be added to the student™s registration plan. When unchecked, only courses can be added to the student™s plan. Check third party degree audit system plans Check box used to indicate whet her the system will look for third party degree audit plans that can be used for the Plan Ahead or Register for Classes paths. When this indicator is checked, th e system checks for third party data based on the SOAREST configuration. Display third party degree audit system plans in registration Check box used to indicate whether third party registration plans are displayed in the Register for Classe s path. This allows students to view and add class sections from the third party degree audit plans (such as Degree Works SEPs) to the registration summary. When this indicator is checked, the Plans tab is displayed in Self- Service./n 108 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Structured Registration This chapter details the setup and processing for structured registration. OverviewIn Banner Student Registration, the term "struc tured registration" refe rs to a registration model where students are guided through the class selection based on their academic program requirements. To use this processing effectively, the academic program definition should be constructed so that the requirements occur in chronological order. In addition, there should be a clear delineation between requirements for each student classification or academic stage. For example, the academic program should have a distinct set of coursework from which the student must choose in order to progress from Freshman to Sophomore or from Year 1 to Year 2. Note: Only the student persona has acce ss to Self-Servi ce structured registration at this time. For each stage defined in an academic program there are three categories into which coursework can be divided: mandatory, optional, and elective. ŁMandatory courses are specific courses the student must take in order to progress from one stage to the next. ŁOptional courses are courses that relate clos ely to the student's major, and the student might be asked to choose a number of courses from a specific list. ŁElective courses are broadly defined sele ctions using course ranges, attributes, departments, and so on. Settings on the Term Control Page (SOATERM) provide processing controls that define when mandatory, optional, or elective coursewo rk is available for students in Self-Service. Students may only drop classes that are part of structured registration if the type (mandatory, optional, or elective) is active. SOATERM also contains controls that allow missing courses to be considered as a fatal error, a warning, or no error. When error checking is set to Fatal, the student will not be able to save any of the registration record until all requirements are met, and registration cannot continue. When error checking is set to Warning or None , if errors occur, the student is allowed to continue with regist ration until the requirements have been met. Rules on the Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) serve as processing controls for CAPP areas using class codes, pr iorities, or naming conventions./n 109 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration CAPP overviewStructured registration uses Banner Student 8.x CAPP rules and programs to facilitate registration. Courses are displayed on Self-Servi ce registration pages that are specifically related to the student's primary academic program or the student™s selected study path. Students must register for the courses presented to them. Students are not allowed to directly enter CRNs or search for classes wh ich do not meet the CAPP criteria. When CAPP is not used, an ex ternal API can be used to request data from external third party applications and receive a list of projected courses to be processed in Banner. In order to make use of CAPP program definitions for structured registration, guidelines must be followed in order for processing to determine which requirements are designated as mandatory, optional, or elective. These guidelines ensure that CAPP data used includes program definitions, along with the associated areas, groups, and rules that are attached to areas or groups. Curriculum records are selected as follows. ŁThe student™s selected, current and active curr iculum record is used and is matched to the CAPP program requirement. ŁWhen study paths are in use, the student's primary, current and active program for his/ her study path is used. ŁThe catalog term for the curriculum record is used to match the effective term of the CAPP program requirement data. ŁIf the curriculum record does not have a catalog term, the registration term is used to find the effective term of th e CAPP program requirement data. Unlike projected registration, it is not necessary to run compliance to use structured registration. Compliance concer ns classes that have already been completed. Structured registration assumes the coursework required within each registration period stands on its own and does not overlap with prior regist ration periods. Based on his/her stage or classification, the student must work with the displayed requirements in order to select class sections and complete registration. When a student logs in to registration, the registration process compiles the structured registration data based on his/her primary current and active program or study path program. When the student submits the selected classes in the summary for registration, structur ed registration processing verifies that all the program requirements have been fulfilled for the registration period. Data used in structured regist ration is pulled from CAPP one time and is not recalculated for subsequent logins. Data mu st be changed in CAPP before students log in and begin registration, in order to be reflected in structured registration. Coursework already taken by the student is not considered in the comp ilation of structured registration data. The SFKRGST/SFKRGST1 package is used to collect data from CAPP and build records for structured registration to guide students as to what courses are needed for registration. Please see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook for more information on setting up and using CAPP. Note: It is assumed that CAPP is in use at your institution. If it is not in use, please refer to the "Use external API" section to set up processing with the third party system that will provide data for use with structured registration. /n 110 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Comparison of projected and structured Projected registration and structur ed registration are similar but different. Here is a quick summary of the differences. Projected registration works as follows: ŁThe focus is on what has yet to be completed, based on what has already occurred in the past. ŁNo validation of how coursework will satisfy s pecific program requirements is performed. ŁCourses are presented to the student in a practical order based on prior coursework and the organization of requirements in CAPP. ŁThe course presentation is flexible, as to ho w much is shown to the student at one time. ŁA course that is identified as mandatory is one that is required for the degree but is not required for the current registration period. ŁStudents can select courses from the projecte d list based on what they perceive as best for them.Structured registration works as follows: ŁThe focus is on the student's current stage or classification and what coursework is required based on the student's academic program. ŁCoursework is based on the categories (manda tory, optional, and electives) that make up the requirements of the current registration period. ŁThe focus is on subject matter for courses that are closely related to the student™s area of study. ŁEach year of coursework is regiment ed, strictly organized, and controlled. ŁA mandatory course is a course that must be taken in the current registration period. ŁStudents are guided through each registration period. ŁStudents are directed as to what courses they must take, and they cannot deviate from the structured requirements. ŁValidation of selected coursework against sp ecific program requirements is performed. ProcessingThis section contains information about settin g up and using structured registration. In summary: Ł Set up structured registration controls on the Term Control Page (SOATERM). Ł Define GTVSDAX rules as processing controls. /n 111 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ŁAccess the Structured tab Banner Student Se lf-Service to use structured registration. The following tables are used specifically wit h Banner Student 9.x st ructured registration. ŁStructured Registration Header Table (SFBSTRH) ŁStructured Registration Rule Detail Table (SFRSTRD) ŁStructured Registration Term Control Table (SOBSTRG) The following Banner views are used spec ifically with struct ured registration. ŁSFVRGCP0 - used to select areas for a student™s curriculum based on rules on GTVSDAX that identify how areas are coded. ŁSFVRGCP1 - used to select student data and match the data to program requirements. ŁSFVRGCP2 - used to select the GTVSDAX rule for identification of CAPP requirements. The internal code group REGPROJSTRUCT is selected for the internal group AREAGROUP or CLASS.ŁSOVCLTP - used to select the primary, current and active, concurrent curriculum record for a term. The term must be incl uded to use this view, where SOVCLTR_STVTERM_CODE = 'XXXX'. ŁSOVCLTR0 - used to select the concurrent curriculum record for a term. The term must be included to use this view, where SOVCLTR_STVTERM_CODE = 'XXXX'. CAPP data detail and display When CAPP is in use, CAPP pr ogram requirements for areas, groups, rules, and courses are considered for structured registration. The data is extracted and presented to the student in Self-Service for sele ction. Checks occur to make sure registration can continue based on the student™s choices. Settings on SOATERM for mandatory, elective, and optional coursework direct how these categories are identified in the CAPP program definition and whether or not those categories must be completed by the student. Rules on GTVSDAX are used to match a CAPP area to a student by associating a class code to a priority, or by associating the CAPP ar ea name to a class code using a naming convention. (See the " GTVSDAX Rules" section for more information.) In Self-Service, the student is guided do wn through the CAPP re quirements into the detailed course requirements, where he/she is allowed to select classes from a specific list. When courses are selected and added, they are displayed in the registration summary, where they can be submitted for registration. Errors are displayed in the Notification Center and can be corrected. CAPP allows text to be attached to the rule header. This text ca n be used to provide additional information to the student about the requirement. In addition, a URL can be entered into the rule text wh ich will allow the student to navigate to a website or document for additional clarification ab out the specific requirement or the academic program. CAPP also allows for text entries to be associat ed with a type. SOATERM is used to associate a specific CAPP text type with the informational text that is available to the student in structured registration. A separate text ty pe is used to identify the URL to which the student can navigate. /n 112 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration The CAPP detail used in structured registration comes from the Program Requirements Page (SMAPROG), the Area Requirem ents Page (SMAAREA), and the Group Requirements Page (SMAGROP). The configuration below describes the basic organization of data within CAPP. This org anization is tiered and allows structured registration to distinguish at the stage or cl assification at which stud ent is positioned. It also presents a significant oppor tunity for students to pick from lists of courses. Each tier supports course ranges, credit hour ranges, and condition ranges. Conditions can be explicit and implicit (sets and subsets). Program, area, and group data This section discusses how data from C APP is used in structured registration. ProgramA program makes the association between the student's curriculum and CAPP. AreaAreas are the building blocks of a student's academic program requirements. There are two types of areas, group areas and course areas. As their names imply, group areas are areas made up of groups, and course areas are made up of course requirements. Groups are basically mini-areas which are made up of course requirements. For structured registration, each area represents what a student must complete for a stage or classification within a registration period. An area can be either a group area or a course area. By convention, each area can contain requirements for mandatory, optional, and elective coursework. The determination of which type of requirements belongs to an area is controlled by entries made on SOATERM. Note: Areas can be captive or dynamic. For more information on the difference between captive and dynamic areas, see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook. When dynamic areas are used, the association between stage or classification must be contained within the area name. Course areaCourse areas are made up of: Łarea course/attributes attachments Łarea course/attributes attachment rules Group areaGroup areas are made up of: Łarea group attachment Łarea group attachment rules /n 113 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Note: Set and subset designations can be used for attachments to both group areas and course areas and allow for the construction and processing of course lists. For more information on sets and subsets, see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook.Other attributesCharacteristics from CAPP course records may al so be used, to make requirements more specific, including: Łattributes ŁcampusŁcollegeŁdepartment Requirement typesData extracted from CAPP falls into three ty pes or collections of requirements (mandatory, optional, and elective) based on the area attachments. ŁType 1 (mandatory) is collected by rule name or specific course area attachment (only the subject and course number low exist), or by single set and subset (related to groups). ŁType 2 (optional) is collected by rule name only as identified on SOATERM. Generally, courses identified as optional closely relate to a student's major or program. ŁType 3 (elective) is collected by rule name only as identified on SOATERM. Generally, these requirements are very broad and allow the student considerable freedom in selection. Note: The above descriptions are simply general guidelines. There is no hard and fast rule that differentiates one type from another. Structured registration does not take into consideratio n CAPP entries that might exist on the include and exclude at course level or restricted subject and attributes processing. Tiered structure example Here is example of the tiered structure. The student is asked to pick two items from a list of three items. The first available item is a course range where the course must have an attribute of "Medieval Literature". The second item is a course range where the course must have an attribute indicating the course is "Non-Shakespearean". The third item is a complex item requiring the student to make mu ltiple selections in order to complete the single requirement. /n 114 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Pick 2 from 3: ŁPick 1 from EN 2000 to En 2999 wit h Attribute MDLV (Medieval Literature) ŁPick 1 from EN 2000 to EN 2999 with Attribute NSHK (Non-Shakespearean) ŁPick 1 of the conditions below: ŁCondition 1: ŒCourse A ŒCourse B ŒCourse C ŒCourse D ŁCondition 2: ŒPick 2 from EN 2000 to 2999 with attribute AAA (American Author) SMAPROG general requirements Access to the general requirements on SM APROG is based on the student's primary program, unless the student has selected a st udy path. If the student has selected a study path, the program associated with that selection is used. The term in the record relates to the effective term of these program requirements. The catalog term from the student™s program record (or the program™s term if the catalog term is Null) is used to determine the correct version of the program requirements to process. Note: The program requirements must be active. When requirements are captive, all the areas should be considered when the process determines which area to use. When requirements are not captive, each area should be checked to see if it is a dynamic area. If it is a dynamic area, it is evaluated to see if the student meets the defined criteria. For more information about captive and dynamic areas, see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook .SMAPROG program area attachments Access to the program area attachments on SMAPROG is based on the student's primary program, unless the student has selected a st udy path. If the student has selected a study path, the program associated with that selection is used. The term in the record relates to the effective term of these program requirements. The catalog term from the student™s program record (or the program™s term if the catalog term is Null) is used to determine the correct version of the program requirements to be processed. The process determines which area pertains to the student™s current registration period by using values from the GTVSDAX REGPROJSTRUCT internal code group. (See the "GTVSDAX rules" section for more information.) /n 115 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ŁWhen the GTVSDAX AREASELECT rule is N, processing evaluates the area name and identifies the area to be used, based on the student's class. This setting must be used when dynamic areas are in use. ŁWhen the GTVSDAX AREASELECT rule is P, processing evaluates the area priority which is associated with th e area when it is attach ed to the CAPP program on SMAPROG. The order in which areas should be evaluated when a compliance report is run can also be used and mapped to a class (year in school). SMAAREA data Here is a summary of the area data used in structured registration processing. ŁAn area is associated with a program by defi ning the program as either captive or non- captive. ŁPrograms that are defined as captive must have their associated areas physically attached. This is done by listing the areas in the Program Areas Attachment information of SMAPROG. ŁNon-captive programs can have either thei r associated areas physically attached or their areas dynamically accessed by the program, based on matching the characteristics attached to the area with the characteristics that belong to the student. For more information on the difference bet ween captive programs and dynamic areas, see the B anner Student CAPP Handbook .ŁThe area header contains the area, term, cata log term, student level, and course level. This data is accessed from the area iden tified from the program area attachments and indicates whether the course or group path should be used in structured registration. ŁThe area course/attribute attachment data us ed in processing includes: set, subset, rule, subject, course numbers low and high, course attributes, required credits and courses, maximum credits and courses, campus , college, and department. ŁThe area course/attribute attachment rule dat a used in processing includes: required number of conditions, required credits per condition, required courses per condition, maximum credits per condition, a nd maximum courses per condition. ŁThe area group attachment is used to asso ciate a set, subset, and group rule with a group. ŁThe area group attachment rule is used to define the conditions for the group rule. Data includes: required number of conditions, condition, set, subset, rule, and group. Area requirement typesStructured registration provides the ability to define up to three types of requirements within a program area. The types are mandato ry, optional and elective. Each type is differentiated by creating the detail requirements under rules defined at the area level. Each type is assigned an arbitrary name which is used as a standard for all areas. The association of the rule name used for each type is then set up on SOATERM. For the type /n 116 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration designated as mandatory, besides having the detail requirements stored under a rule, the detail requirements can also exist attached directly to the area. Generally, mandatory courses are those which are required based on the student™s program and year in the school. Mandatory courses cannot be dropped or changed in structured registration. However, sections can be added and dropped. Courses can be designated as mandatory on SMAAREA without including them in an area rule. Mandatory courses are single course requirements attached directly to an area or attached to an area as a rule or group in CAPP. Optional and elective courses can be selected from lists presented to the student. These lists of courses can contain specific course s, course ranges, or courses with specified attributes. Optional and elec tive courses are defined in CAPP usi ng area level rule attachments. Processing path Here is a sample path for navigating through structured registration in Self-Service. A breadcrumb trail is displayed at the top of the page, so you can see where you are in the levels of data. Use the breadcrumb trail to navigate back and forth. 1.Select Register for Classes from the Registration landing page. 2.Log in to the application. 3.Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. ŁTerms that are open for registration are listed. ŁStudy paths can be selected at this point if they are available. 4.You are taken to the Register for Class page with the Structured tab displayed. 5.View the mandatory, elective, and opti onal requirements for registration. Display and availability are based on the settings on SOATERM. 6.Use the Structure Overview button to see the high level requirements for the rule in a tree structure display. 7.Use the View buttons to drill down into each requirement select ion area rule.8.Use the View Section buttons to drill down into th e sections that meet the requirement and have been pushed to the list of choices. 9.Use the Refine link at this level to refine your search and limit the set of returned sections.10. Use the Add buttons to add the sections to the registration summary. 11. Use the Submit button to register for the added classes. 12. Resolve any registration errors pres ented in the Notification Center. 13. Access the Schedule and Options tab to modify course variables as allowed. /n 117 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Set up structured registration Do the following to set up structured registration in administrative Banner. 1.Access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 2.Select the Term Management tab and go to the Registration Model section. 3.Select the Structured indicator. 4.Select the Structured Registration tab. 5.Verify the settings for struct ured registration controls. 5.1. Define the error severity. ŒFatal indicates the student must complete all registration requirements prior to exiting.ŒWarning indicates the student will be warned that all registration requirements have not been completed, but the student will be allowed to save what has been completed. ŒNone indicates the student will not be stopped or wa rned if requirements have not been completed. 5.2. Define whether registration is active for mandatory requirements. Check the Mandatory Active checkbox. If mandatory requirements are defined under the area rules, enter the name of the mandatory rule key to be retrieved from CAPP or the third party software. The rule key is the name by which the mandatory classes are defined. If left blank, registration expects mandatory clas ses to be defined at the top most level of the CAPP area. 5.3. Define whether registration is active for optional requirements. Check the Optional Activ e checkbox. Enter the name of the optional rule key to be retrieved from CAPP or the third party software. The rule key is the name by which the optional classes are defined. The rule key is required. 5.4. Define whether registration is active for elective courses. Check the Elective Active checkbox. Enter the name of the elective rule key to be retrie ved from CAPP or the third party software. The rule key is the name by which the elective classes are defined. The rule key is required. 5.5. Enter the information for the external API when CAPP is not in use. (See step 7.) 5.6. Define the print type and/or lin ks type for information text. /n 118 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ŒWhen additional text inst ructions have been appen ded to a CAPP rule and should be displayed to th e student, enter the print ty pe to be used in the Structured Print Type field. ŒWhen the rule text contains a URL that is to be displayed to the student, enter the print type to be used in the Links Print Type field. 6.Access GTVSDAX and set up the rules for AREASELECT and CLASS .See the " GTVSDAX Rules" sect ion for more information.7.Set up the external API if CAPP is not in use. See the "Use external API" section for more information. 8.Access the Program Requirements Page (SMAPROG). Verify that the registration model used on SOATERM is defined for the program and term range.Time-Ticketing You can use time-ticketing to restrict students to specific time periods when they can access registration. Students can be eval uated based on a predefined set of characteristics, or they can be pre-assigned to groups. Those groups are mapped to specific registration times. The Third Party Registration Time Controls Page (SFARGTC) provides an alternative to individually assigned time-ticketing, through the creation of term-specific registration eligibility profiles. Ther efore, only those students who ma tch the criteria for a valid time control may register at any given time. Time-ticketing is controlled by the WEBRESTTKT rule on GTVSDAX.Here is a high level summary for individually assigned time-ticketing. 1.Define time slots and assign their priorities on the Registration Priority Control Page (SFARCTT). 2.Create group codes and associate each group with a priority on the Registration Group Control Page (SFARCTL). 3.Assign a group to a student ( and therefore assign the time slots to the student) on the Student Registration Group Page (SFARGRP). 4.Review the group information and student group assignments on the Student Registration Group Query Page (SFIRGRP). See the "Registration" chapter in the Banner Student User Guide 8.x for detailed information on using time ticket ing with registration processing. /n 119 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Structured registration controls Use the Term Control Page (SOATERM) to set up structured registration controls. In the Term Management tab, access the indicators in the Registration Model section to designate which type of registration proce ssing you wish to use for the term. Choices are Regular, Structured , or Projected.In the Structured Registration Controls, define the field values. These fields come from the Structured Registration Term Control Table (SOBSTRG). Use this field to define the error severi ty setting for structured registration. Use these fields to set up the mandatory rule. Use these fields to set up the optional rule. FieldsDescriptions Error SeverityRadio group used to select error severity. Choices are Fatal , Warning , None .ŁFatal - Registration changes are not saved until all structured registration requirements are met. ŁWarning - Registration changes are saved. The student is warned when structured registration requirements have not been met. ŁNone - Registration changes are saved. The student is not informed when structured registration requirements have not been met. FieldsDescriptions Mandatory ActiveCheck box used to indicate whether the mandatory requirements are presented to the student in Self-Service registration. Mandatory Rule KeyDefines the rule under which mandatory requirements are found. Enter a key such as MANDATORY .When this field is blank, the mandatory requirements attached directly to the area are used. FieldsDescriptions Optional ActiveCheck box used to indicate whether the optional requirements are presented to the student in Self-Service registration. Optional Rule KeyDefines the rule under which optional requirements are found. Enter a key such as OPTIONAL . When this field is blank, the optional rule cannot be active. /n 120 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Use these fields to set up the elective rule. Use this field to set up the external API. Use these fields to set up the information text. GTVSDAX rulesRules on GTVSDAX with the internal code group of REGPROJSTRUCT are used for structured registration processing. AREASELECT ruleUse the AREASELECT rule to determine whether to use the name convention for the area or the area priority. Area order is based on the student™s year in school. Values are P - Priority, N - Name, or A - All. The default is P.FieldsDescriptions Elective ActiveCheck box used to indicate whether the elective requirements are presented to the student in Self-Service registration. Elective Rule KeyDefines the rule under which elective requirements are found. Enter a key such as ELECTIVE .When this field is blank, the elective rule cannot be active. FieldsDescriptions External APIName of the external API us ed for processing when CAPP is not in use. FieldsDescriptions Structured Print Type Print type code and description used for structured registration information text to be displayed in Self-Service. Select a value from the list of print type choices. Links Print Type Print type code and description us ed for display of links/URLs in structured registration. Select a value from the list of print type choices. /n 121 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration CLASS rule Use the CLASS rule to select the class to be processed (such as first year, second year, and so on) and mapped to an area. Multiple CLASS rules can be created. ŁWhen the AREASELECT rule is set to N, the name area of the class code found at the end of the area name is used. The CLASS rule can have numerical or alphabetical codes. However, that code must be used as the student™s class code, and the ar ea assigned to the student™s program on SMAPROG must end with the same code. ŁWhen the AREASELECT rule is set to P, the area priority is matched to the sequence number of the student's class code entered for the CLASS rule. The CLASS rule must have a sequence number of 1, 2, 3, or 4. The system looks for an area associated with the student's program on SMAPROG that has a priority value equal to the GTVSDAX sequence number of the CLASS record with an external code equal to the student's class code. Rule summaryThe table below shows sample seed data rules. Please note that the external code for the class code can be any valid class code. It does not have to be numeric. Also, the sequence number does not necessarily correspond to the class year, such as sequence 1 does not have to correspond to 1st year cl ass. Sequence number 1 maps to the area with priority of 1 on SMAPROG. Sequence number 2 maps to the area with priority 2 on SMAPROG, and so on. Therefore, a class code of SR could be mapped to sequence number 1 if you choose to do so. Area name and selection of CAPP areasWhen you wish to use th e area name to select CAPP area s for a student's program, the following GTVSDAX rules must exist. External CodeInternal Code Internal Code Sequence NumberInternal Code GroupDescription P, N, A Default is PAREASELECTREGPROJSTRUCTUs e name convention or priority. P = Priority, N = Name, A = All01CLASS1REGPROJSTRUCT1st year class 02CLASS2REGPROJSTRUCT2nd year class 03CLASS3REGPROJSTRUCT3rd year class 04CLASS4REGPROJSTRUCT4th year class /n 122 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration When this combination of GT VSDAX rules exists and an area name associated with the student's program on SMAPROG ends with the class code value, the requirements associated with that area are displayed in structured registration. For structured registration, only the primary curriculum progra m is selected. If study paths are used, the current and active curriculum reco rd per study path is selected. ExampleA student's class code is 01. When a GTVSDAX record exists with the internal code of CLASS , the internal code group of REGPROJSTRUCT , and the external code of 01, and an area assigned to the student's program on SMAPROG has a name that ends with 01, the requirements associated with that area are displayed in structured registration. ExampleA student's class code is FR. When a GTVSDAX record exists with an internal code of CLASS , an internal code group of REGPROJSTRUCT , an external code of FR, and an area assigned to the student's program on SMAPROG has a name that ends with FR, the requirements associated with that area are displayed in structured registration. Area priority and selection of CAPP areas When you wish to use th e area priority to select CAPP ar eas for a student's program, the following GTVSDAX rules must exist. The GTVSDAX CLASS rule with sequence number of 1 is mapped to the area on SMAPROG with the area priority of 1. The external code in this record can be any valid class value (such as 01, FR, SO, 03, etc.). When the external code is equal to the student's class value, the area on SMAPROG with a priority of 1 is used for the structured registration requirements. External Code Internal Code Internal Code Group NAREASELECT REGPROJSTRUCT Student's class code as displayed on SGASTDN CLASSREGPROJSTRUCT External Code Internal Code Internal Code Sequence NumberInternal Code Group PAREASELECT REGPROJSTRUCT Student's class code as displayed on SGASTDN CLASS1, 2, 3, or 4REGPROJSTRUCT /n 123 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ExampleWhen the CLASS rule has an external code of FR with a sequence number of 1, the requirements for the SMAPROG area with a priority of 1 will be displayed for a student with the class code of FR. When the external code is 03 with a sequence number of 1, the requirements for the SMAPROG area with a priority of 1 will be displayed for a student with a class code of 03.ExampleThe CLASS record with a sequence number of 2 is mapped to an external code of 03. In this case, an area on SMAPROG with the area priority of 2 will be used for students with a classification of 03.All area requirements When you wish to use requirements for all areas associated with the student's program, the following GTVSDAX rules must exist. In this case, all requirements from all areas associated wit h the student's program will be displayed to the student, regardless of the area name, the priority of the area on SMAPROG, and the student's class. The specific requirements displayed are determined by the SOATERM settings for mandatory requirements, optional requirements, and electives. ExampleHere is an example where the GTVSDAX AREASELECT rule is set to A, and the student's CAPP program definition contains three areas. When the SOATERM settings for stru ctured registration are set with Mandatory Active checked and Optional Active checked, the student would see all of the mandatory requirements from GEN-ED and MAJOR along with the optional requirements from MAJOR. The student would not see the electives from GEN-ED and ENGL-ELEC. External Code Internal Code Internal Code Group AAREASELECT REGPROJSTRUCT Program AreaRules Requirement Type GEN-ED 2 rules attachedMANDATORY, ELECTIVE MAJOR 2 rules attachedMANDATORY, OPTIONAL ENGL-ELEC1 rule attachedELECTIVE /n 124 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration When the SOATERM settings for stru ctured registration are set with Elective Active checked, the student would see all of the elective requirements from MAJOR and ENGL- ELEC. The student would not see the mandator y or optional requirements from MAJOR. Refine SearchA Refine Search option is provided to manage the number of sections presented to the user. CAPP supports single co urse numbers, course number rang es, attributes, and various characteristics, any which of can resu lt in large numbers of sections being listed. Structured registration uses the Basic Sear ch page layout in Se lf-Service when the Refine link is selected. Processing does not support the expansion to the Advanced Search. The Basic Search and the Refine Search display share the same SOAWSCR configuration entries. When the Refine Search option is configured for display, all the fields the student can use must be included on a single page. It is recommended that only the low and high course range fields are displayed and not the Course Number field. When either the Course Number Low value or the Course Number High value from CAPP exists, all Course Number fields on the Refine Search page will be protected from update. When both the Course Number Low and the Course Number High values are populated in CAPP, the Course Number field on the Refine Search page is Null. The Course Number Low from CAPP populates the low Course Number Range field, and the Course Number High from CAPP populates the high Course Number Range field. Structured Overview display When using structured registration in Self-Ser vice, a breadcrumb trail is presented at the top of the page to show which level of inform ation is being displayed. As you navigate to each new level of data, that new level is added to the breadcrumb trail. A sample breadcrumb trail could be: Top > Elective > Elective Classes for Year 1 > Select from the attached 9 requirements . When the Refine Search option is used, a sample breadcrumb trail could be: Top > Elective > Elective Classes for Year 1 > Select from the attached 9 requirements > Search Results .You can also access the Structured Overview display using the Structured Overview button from any level of requirements data on the Structured tab. This view displays a hierarchy of requirements that can be reviewed without drilling down th rough the levels of data using the breadcrumb trail. This view prov ides a visual display of requirements that have been met (green ch eck mark), and /or still need to be met (gray check mark), based on mandatory, optional, or elective areas. Use external APIStructured registration processing can request data from external third party applications and receive a list of courses to be processe d in Banner. This is done by setting up an external API when CAPP is not in use. /n 125 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Configure the external APIDo the following to set up the external API us ed to retrieve structur ed registration data from a third party application. 1.Create a new record for the external RESTful API code and description on the External API Information Validation Page (STVREST). For example, SRG - Third Party Connection for Structured Registration This code is used in step 2. 2.Define the RESTful API cont rols on the External API Connection Information Page (SOAREST). 2.1. Select the code created on STVREST. 2.2. Enter the username, password, and URL information used to connect to your third party APIs. 3.Update the RESTful API code on SOATERM. This step tells your registration process ho w to collect structured registration data. 3.1. Enter the term you wish to use. 3.2. Select the Structured Registration tab. 3.3. Enter the external API using the code defined on STVREST. 3.4. Save the changes. Use third party service The third party service needs to send all processed data in the proper hierarchy for rules and rules under rules. If AND/OR conditions exist for requirements, the third party service should group them accordingly. The following minimum requirements must be me t by your third party service provider. URLYour third party service should be exposed as a RESTful Service on the URL accessible by the Banner 9.x application. AuthenticationExternal API access requires Base64 encoding of the username and password. The third party service is expected to authenticate all incoming requests with the Base64 encoded username and password. The response is returned when the data is successfully validated, based on the credentials entered in SOAREST. /n 126 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Request criteriaThe Banner 9.x application will provide following criteria for the RESTful request. ResponseA JSON type of response is expected from the third party service. The Banner 9.x application will request "application/json " as the acceptToken in the request. The response should contain hierarchical in formation about structured registration data. The response contains one or more headers, and each header can contain hierarchical subRules. Header JSONHere is the header JSON info rmation for criteria field, field attribute, and description. Response FieldField Attribute Description bannerId String (9 char) Student™s ID, required. term String (6 char) Student™s term, required. Criteria Field Field Attribute Description bannerId String (9 char) Student™s ID, required. termCode String (6 char) Student™s term, required. Program String (12 char) Student's program code - required. programDescriptionString (30 char) Program description. studyPath Number (2) 0 - 99 Key sequence of the study path for the structured registration header record. catalogTerm String (6 char) Catalog term code of the learner. typeCode String (1 char) ["1", "2", "3"] The type value corresponding to the ACTIVE_IND for the term. Valid values are: 1 - Mandatory Active, 2 - Optional Active, 3 - Elective Active./n 127 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration Rule JSON Here is the rule JSON inform ation for response field, field attribute, and description. subRules List Sub rules represent a list of rules that are children of the current rule. This field provides hierarchical capabilities to the structured registration data. Response Field Field Attribute Description bannerId String (9 char) Student™s ID, required. termCode String (6 char) Student™s term, required. area String (10 char) Entity used to define general requirements and any related detail requirements for use as a program component - required. areaDescriptionString (30 char) Description for area of study. setString (3 char) Used to associate individual rules and provide AND and OR groupings. Refer to the Banner Student CAPP Handbook for details. subset Number (3) 0-999 Defines the relationship of the rules denoted by the associated set. When the subset is specified, the set must also be specified. groupName String (30 char) Name of the group associated with the requirement. ruleName String (10 char) Used to segregate detail requirements which need additional controls over and above the controls already specified for the area detail requirements. ruleDescriptionString (30 char) Description for the rule.ruleConditionNumber (3) 0-999 When the type of rule is a condition, this is the number of the condition. Criteria Field Field Attribute Description /n 128 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ruleRequiredNumber Condition Number (3) 0-999 Required number of conditions that must be met. Applicable for rule requirements only. ruleCondition RequiredCredits Decimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Required number of credits per condition. ruleCondition RequiredConnector String (1 char) [A,O,N] Used to designate whether overall credits and overall courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. ruleCondition RequiredCourses Number (3) 0-999 Required number of courses per condition. ruleConditionMax Credits Decimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Maximum number of credits per condition. ruleConditionMax Connector String (1 char) [A,O,N] Used to designate whether maximum credits and maximum courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. ruleConditionMax Courses Number (3) 0-999 Maximum number of courses per condition. ruleTotalRequired Credits Decimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Required number of total credits for the rule.ruleTotalRequired Connector String (1 char) [A,O,N] Used to designate whether overall credits and overall courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. ruleTotalRequired Courses Number (3) 0-999 Required number of total courses for the rule.ruleTotalMaximum Credits Decimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Maximum total credits that can be taken for the rule. Response Field Field Attribute Description /n 129 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration ruleTotalMaximum Connector String (1 char) [A,O,N] Used to designate whether maximum credits and maximum courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. ruleTotalMaximum Courses Number (3) 0-999 Maximum total number of courses that can be taken for the rule. courseRequired Credits Decimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Required number of credits for the course requirement. Applicable to course only. courseRequired Connector String (1 char) [A,O,N] Required courses/credits connector used to designate whether overall credits and overall courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. Applicable to course requirement only. courseRequired Courses Number (3) 0-999 Number of courses required for the course requirement. courseMaxCreditsDecimal (8,3) 0.000 - 99999999.999 Maximum number of credits for the course requirement. courseMaxConnectorString (1 char) [A,O,N] Maximum courses/credits connector used to designate whether overall credits and overall courses should be considered together or individually as a requirement. Connector can be And, Or, None, or Null. Applicable for course requirement only. courseMaxCoursesNumber (3) 0-999 Maximum number of courses required by the course requirement. subject String (4 char) Subject code. courseNumberLowString (5 char) Course number low. The subject and course number low should refer to an existing section. Response Field Field Attribute Description /n 130 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Structured Registration courseNumberHighString (5 char) Course number high. If course number low and course number high are both populated, then a range is indicated. Course number high cannot exist without course number low. courseAttribute Code String (4 char) Attribute code for the course/rule. The attribute code must exist in Banner 9.x. campusCode String (3 char) Campus code for the course/rule. The campus code must exist in Banner 9.x. collegeCode String (2 char) College code for the course/rule. The college code must exist in Banner 9.x. departmentCodeString (4 char) Department code for the course/ rule. The department code must exist in Banner 9.x. source String (30 char) Identifies the source of data for ruleLink and informationText fields. ruleLink String (2000 char) URL presented to the student to prompt for more information. informationTextCLOB When multiple in formational text items exist for the requirement, all items should be concatenated into a single string. subRules List Represents list of rules that are children of the current rule. This field provides hierarchical capabilities for the structured registration data. Response Field Field Attribute Description /n 131 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Projected RegistrationThis chapter details the setup and processing for projected registration. OverviewIn Banner Student Registration, the term "proje cted registration" refers to a registration model where a projected list of courses is ge nerated. The projections allow an institution to produce a list of courses for which students are expected to regist er and therefore plan for the anticipated number of students per course. In Self-Service, students can use the projected list as a registration guide or as specif ic instructions when th e list is limited to the courses for which a student must register. The course projection list is based on CAPP compliance results for program requirements and area priority. As program requirements can be restrictive (courses can only be selected from the program or curriculum, and courses must be taken in a specific order), an institution can try to predict which cour ses a student will take in the next term and perform schedule planning accordingly. A batch process is used to create the projected courses list. Filters are used to determine the number of areas to be considered in the projections. Courses are marked as most probable, that is they are the most likely to be registered for in the next term. This is based on course credit limits and course attributes. Elective courses can also be identified and categorized for the students. Courses in CAPP that are "not-met" or not completed are included in the list of projected courses. First course rules can be applied to filter courses by department, college, and subject. Prerequis ite checking and corequisite checking are used to further refine the list of courses. Please see the Banner Student CAPP Handbook for more information on setting up and using CAPP. Note: It is assumed that CAPP is in use at your institution. If it is not in use, please refer to the "Use external API" section to set up processing with the third party system that will pr ovide data for use with projected registration. Comparison of projected and structured Projected registration and structur ed registration are similar but different. Here is a quick summary of the differences. Projected registration works as follows: ŁThe focus is on what has yet to be completed, based on what has already occurred in the past. /n 132 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŁNo validation of how coursework will satisfy s pecific program requirements is performed. ŁCourses are presented to the student in a practical order based on prior coursework and the organization of requirements in CAPP. ŁThe course presentation is flexible, as to ho w much is shown to the student at one time. ŁA course that is identified as mandatory is one that is required for the degree but is not required for the current registration period. ŁStudents can select courses from the projecte d list based on what they perceive as best for them.Structured registration works as follows: ŁThe focus is on the student's current stage or classification and what coursework is required based on the student's academic program. ŁCoursework is based on the categories (manda tory, optional, and electives) that make up the requirements of the current registration period. ŁThe focus is on subject matter for courses that are closely related to the student™s area of study. ŁEach year of coursework is regiment ed, strictly organized, and controlled. ŁA mandatory course is a course that must be taken in the current registration period. ŁStudents are guided through each registration period. ŁStudents are directed as to what courses they must take, and they cannot deviate from the structured requirements. ŁValidation of selected coursework against sp ecific program requirements is performed. ProcessingThis section contains information about setting up and using projected registration. In summary: ŁThe following Banner Student 8.x admini strative forms are used with projected registration. ŁProjection Config uration by Program Form (SFALPRO) ŁProjection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) ŁThe Term Control Page (SOATERM) contains controls used to set up projected registration. The following tables are used specifically wit h Banner Student 9.x projected registration. ŁProjected Registration Configuration by Program Table (SFRPCFG) ŁProjected Registration First Courses Table (SFRPFCR) /n 133 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŁProjected Registration Most Pro bable Attribute Table (SFRPMPA) ŁStudent/Term Projections Table (SFRREGP) ŁProjected Registration Term Control Table (SOBPROJ) ŁThe following Banner 8.x report and process are used with projected registration. ŁStudent Projection Process (SFPPROJ) ŁSchedule Planning Report (SFRPRES) Ł The Projections tab Banner Student Self-Ser vice is used for projected registration. Programs, areas, and complianceUse the following Banner 8.x pages to set up CAPP. CAPP requirements are as follows for projected registration. ŁAll programs have defined requirements and attached areas. ŁOne area is defined for each program term. ŁProgram areas are organized in chronological order. ŁThe area priority defined on SMAPROG for the program indicates the order in which the student should register for the set of courses in the area. ŁArea priorities are defined in sequences of 10, such as 10, 20, 30, and so on. ŁArea names can also be used to identify the sequence in which the area courses should be taken. In this case, the ending characters of the area name are matched to the student's class code to identify the sequence. The AREASELECT rule in GTVSDAX specifies the mode used to identify the area sequence. When the AREASELECT rule is set to P in GTVSDAX then the following occurs. ŁFor captive programs, the projection process associates a priority of 99 with the areas on SMAPROG, when no priority has been associated with the areas. PageActionProgram Definitions Rules Page (SMA PRLE)Set up CAPP program requirements. Area Library Page (SMAALIB)Define areas. Area Requirements Page (SMAAREA)Set up area requirements. Group Requirements Page (SMAGROP)Associate areas with programs. Group Requirements Page (SMAGROP)Define the area priority. /n 134 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŁFor non-captive programs, the projecti on process associates a priority of 99 with the areas on SMAPROG, as well as for areas considered from the area library based on matching area qualifiers. Priorities defined on SMAAREA are also considered. ŁRules are used to define elective courses, as not all elective options should be considered as most probable, and elective courses must be listed under a rule. If a global or generic course needs to be marked as most probable where an elective course is considered in the projection, this is called the "global elective". To identify the global elective, the rule must have the same code as the subject and course number of the global elective course. ŁCAPP compliance must be run for all students for the cu rrent program on the student record. Ł Compliance is run for the primary curriculum program when the study path is not active. ŁCompliance is run for all active programs from the student curriculum when the study path is active. ŁIn progress courses must be included in compliance. Warning! Projected registration will not work properly if areas have attached groups. Data used from compliance Projected registration processing retrieves co mpliance data related to coursework that is marked incomplete for a student's program. However, not all data from incomplete coursework in compliance is carried over when the corresponding projection records are created. Boolean data such as sets, subsets, and condit ions in CAPP rules is not considered when the projection process reads data from compliance. Only data related to the program, associated areas, area priorities, and student level is stored in the corresponding projected registration records. Course-related data such as subject, course number, attributes, and so on, is also stored in the corresponding projected registration records. Campus, college, and de partment data that is configur ed in CAPP rules and is also present in corresponding compliance records is processed and stored in the projected records. The data is passed as internal filter criteria when sections are listed for projected courses in Self-Service. The following data elements are read from compliance records when projection records are processed: ŁPIDMŁterm code Łprogram code Łarea code /n 135 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Łarea description Łarea priority Łsubject code Łcourse number lowŁcourse number high Łattribute code Łlevel code Łcampus code Łcollege codeŁdepartment code Process summaryUsing projected registration involves the setu p of controls and rules, as well as running processes to gather and refine the projecte d data. Projected controls are set up on SOATERM. Once the controls are in place, the Projection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) in Banner 8.x is used to build projection rules and filters by program. Projections are then created by generati ng CAPP compliance and running the Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ). The projected lis t that is created is collected in a table. The list of courses for a student can be manua lly edited using the Projection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) in Banner 8.x. Once any ed its are completed, the Schedule Planning Report (SFRPRES) is used to view the expected enrollment in each course in the projected list. Projected registration processing identifies in complete areas for a st udent, lists courses in sequence by not met status and area priority, and analyzes incomplete coursework for the area. It then generates a pretend or mock registration to eliminate not met course prerequisites and missing corequisites. This e limination is based on the parameter values in SFPPROJ.When manual entries or changes are made to the projected list, and compliance and SFPPROJ are run again, the manual changes are retained and are not overridden. Only the system-generated entries are updated. Once projections have been created, the studen t can register for courses on the list. If a course is not selected for regi stration, the process will move it to the projected list for the next semester. The following packages are used to process projected registration. ŁSFKRGPJ/SFKRGPJ1 This package is used to collect and proces s registration projections. Procedures are used to collect unmet courses from compliance, filter records based on projection configurations, and build projected registration courses. /n 136 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŁSFKRPRJ/SFKRPRJ1This package is used to include failed cour ses in projected registration processing. Procedures are used to create the projection when the student fails in the registered course. The process accepts input parameters from the post update trigger in SFRSTCR, and checks whether the student has failed the course. If yes, the process checks if projections are available for the student. If the course is not included in the projection records, the process adds the course to the list of projected courses. Filter by maximum areasProjected registration uses filtering based on the area priority to determine which areas to ignore or consider for a student. The maximum number of areas to project can be set to only show the next specific areas (or semesters) for a student above the areas that have already been met, instead of showing all the areas remaining for the student ongoing. This allows the process to display the projected courses for the immediate semesters of registration. Non-met areas with lower priorities are not considered. The order in which the student must complete the area requirements is controlled by the area priority on SMAPROG. Here is an example of using maximum areas with a program design of six semesters or terms.Program: BA in Computer Science Assuming the student is already registered in all the courses for the First Semester area, the projection will show all of the courses in the five remain ing areas. However, you may only want to present the student projections for the next two areas or semesters and prevent the student from registering in a co urse from a later area such as the Sixth Semester area. To include only the two semesters after the current registration semester, you need to define the maximum level of "2" above the late st met area. This maximum is set up on SFALPRO for each program using the Maximum Number of Areas to Project field. The student projection will then only present courses from the Second Semester and Third Semester areas to the student. AreaPriorityFirst Semester10 Second Semester20 Third Semester30 Fourth Semester40 Fifth Semester50 Sixth Semester60 /n 137 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration The projection process identifies the non-me t area with the minimum priority and then considers only the next maximum priority area. For example, the non-met area with the minimum priority is the Second Semester area (priority 20). The non-met area with the maximum priority is the Third Semester area (priority 30). Because the maximum level is set to 2, only areas with the priority of 20 and 30 are considered in the projection. All areas above priority 30 are eliminated from considerat ion. If an area with a priority of 25 exists, that area and priority would still be included in the projection. Note: If the program setup and area setup at your institution are different from what is suggested, and you wish to include all priorities in the projection, use a number such as 999 for the maximum number of areas. The system logic determines the maximum priority to be included in the projection process. Priorities are assumed to be based on increments of 10 (10, 20, 30, and so on). Therefore, the maximum level is multiplied by a factor of 10 . The maximum level of 2 is then converted to 20. The logic adds the maximum level to the minimum priority, and subtracts 10. (20 + 20 maximum levels - 10) = 30 All areas with a priority above 30 are excluded from the projection. The factor of 10 is the default value used to compare area priorities. This can be set to "1" on GTVSDAX for the PRIADJFAC rule. Only values of 1 and 10 are valid factors. See the "GTVSDAX rules" section for more information. Filter by student classStudent classes can be linked to program areas that are in progress for a student. This means that student classes are also related to the area priority. Therefore, the student class codes used must be numeric, such as 1, 2, 3, and so on. A class could be assigned, even when the student has non-met courses from a previously used area. That could cause the maximum number of areas rule to produce inappropriate results. Therefore, the Maximum Number of Areas Over Student Class field on SFALPRO defines the number of levels or area priorities for the program that are included in the projection, above the area priority determined by the student cla ss. Processing always us es the lowest limit estimated by maximum number of levels or the maximum number of areas over student class when that maximum is used. Here is an example where the student class code is determined by the semester in which the student is registered. Program: BA in Computer Science AreaPriorityStudent Class CodeFirst Semester10 1Second Semester20 2Third Semester30 3/n 138 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration In the previous example, the student has a class of "1 First Semester". If the Maximum Number of Areas Over Student Class field is set to 1, the limit is estimated by adding "1" to the class, using a factor of 10 for this value. Class: 10 + maximum over class * 10 = 20 Only the courses with area priorities below or equal to 20 are included in the projection. The factor of 10 is the default value used to compare area priorities. This can be set to "1" on GTVSADX for the PRIADJFAC rule, as in the maximum levels example. See the "GTVSDAX rules" section for more information. Filter by first courseCourse subjects may need to be considered in projections and marked as most probable, regardless of the area priority and other defined rules. Some programs need to include the first non-met course in the projection, without considering the priority. These types of courses can be identified for each program based on a combination of department, college, and subject. The maximum number of courses is defined for each rule. Mark course as most probableCourses are considered as most probable based on the following criteria: Łmaximum credits A student is supposed to register for a maximum number of credits in each term. The process sorts the projected courses by area prio rity and marks the first courses. It then adds the number of credits for each course until the total is greater than the maximum credits per term as defined on SFALPRO. Łspecial attributes Some courses are always considered as most probable based on a special attribute. The attributes are defined for the program on SFALPRO. Łfirst course ruleCourses considered to be first courses are included regardless of area priority. Fourth Semester404 Fifth Semester505 Sixth Semester606 AreaPriorityStudent Class Code/n 139 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Registration planningProjected courses can be presented to the st udent when registration plans are created in Self-Service. The SOATERM projected registration settings are also applicable to registration planning. Processing path Here is a sample path for getting started and navigating through projected registration in Self-Service.1.Select Register for Classes from the Registration landing page. 2.Log in to the application. 3.Use the Select a Term page to choose a term. ŁTerms that are open for registration are listed. ŁStudy paths can be selected at this point if they are available. 4.You are taken to the Register for Classes - Find Classes tab. 5.Select the Projections tab. 6.Review the list of projected courses for the term. 7.Use the View Sections button to view existing sections or search on course sections. 8.In the Search Results, use the Add button to add sections to the registration summary. 9.Use the Submit button to submit the sections for registration. Set up projected registrationDo the following to set up projected r egistration in administrative Banner. 1.Access the Term Control Page (SOATERM). 2.Select the Term Management tab and then the Registration Model section. 3.Select the Projected indicator. 4.Select the Projected Registration tab. 5.Verify the settings for projected registration controls. 5.1. Set up restrictions. ŒDefine whether the term is in use in Self-Service for projected registration. ŒDefine whether registration is rest ricted to projected courses only. ŒDefine whether registration is restrict ed when no projected courses are listed, and the student is required to have a projection. 5.2. Set up student projections. /n 140 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŒDefine whether failed courses are included in the projection. This captures when a student fails a course, and the course is then added to the projected list. (This is helpful when compliance has been run with the assumption that students would pass their current classes.) ŒDefine whether failed courses can be marked as most probable for the projection to help forecast seat requirements for courses in the term. This does not impact registration processing. 5.3. Define the value which will be used to identify mandatory courses for registration. This will be compared against the valu e in the area rule description on SMAAREA. The mandatory rule key is used when courses that are required for students to complete their degrees have been entered into CAPP area rules, and you wish to have them designated as m andatory on the projected list. 5.4. Define the value which will be used to id entify elective course s for registration. This will be compared against the value in area rule description field in SMAAREA form.The elective rule key is used when courses that are optional for students to complete their degrees have been entered into CAPP area rules, and you wish to have them designated as elective on the projected list. 5.5. Enter the information for the external API when CAPP is not in use. 6.Access GTVSDAX and set up the rules for AREASELECT , CLASS , and PRIADJFAC .See the " GTVSDAX Rules" sect ion for more information.7.Set up the external API if CAPP is not in use. See the "Use external API" section for more information. 8.Access the Program Requirements Page (SMAPROG). Verify that the registration model used on SOATERM is defined for the program and term range.9.Set up program filtering on the Projection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) in Banner 8.x. 9.1. Enter the program for the rule. 9.2. Set the maximum area or class and credit parameters for the rule. 9.3. Set up the combinations of department, co llege, and subject to identify courses that can be treated as first courses. 9.4. View and update the most probabl e attributes for the program. 10. Run the Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) in Banner 8.x to produce projection results. /n 141 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration 11. Review and modify results on the Projec tion Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) in Banner 8.x. 12. Run the Schedule Planning Report (SFRPRES) in Banner 8.x to see expected registration for courses. Projected registration controlsUse the Term Control Page (SOATERM) to set up projected registration controls. In the Term Management tab, access the indicators in the Registration Model section to designate which type of registration proce ssing you wish to use for the term. Choices are Regular, Structured , or Projected.In the Projected Registration Controls, set up th e sets of controls fields. These fields come from the Projected Registration Term Control Table (SOBPROJ). Use these fields to set up restrictions. Use these fields to define student projection settings. Use this field to set up the mandatory rule. FieldsDescriptions Term open for Self-Service Projections Check box used to indicate whether projected registration is in use for the term. Restrict to Projected CoursesCheck box used to indicate whethe r registration and planning are restricted to only projected courses. Restrict to Null Projections Check box used to indicate whethe r registration and planning are restricted when no projected courses are listed. FieldsDescriptions Include Failed Courses in Student Projections Check box used to indicate whether failed courses are included in the projections. Mark Failed Courses as Most Probable Check box used to indicate whether failed courses can be marked as most probable in the projections. /n 142 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Use this field to set up the elective rule. Use this field to set up the external API. GTVSDAX rulesRules on GTVSDAX with the internal code group of REGPROJSTRUCT are used with projected registration. AREASELECT ruleUse the AREASELECT rule to determine whether to use the name convention for the area or use the area priority. Values are P - Priority, N - Name, or A - All. The default is P.Note: The value of A is not used with projections. ŁWhen an institute is using CAPP and has asso ciated sequenced priorities with areas in SMAPROG based on the order in which they will be taken, the value of P should be used. ŁWhen an institute uses area naming conventi ons to identify the sequence, the value of N should be used. FieldsDescriptions Mandatory Rule KeyValue used to identify mandator y courses. Enter a key such as MANDATORY .When this field is blank, only independent courses listed in the area requirements are considered as mandatory. FieldsDescriptions Elective Rule KeyValue used to identify elective courses. Enter a key such as ELECTIVE .When this is blank, the elective rule does not apply. FieldsDescriptions External APIName of the external API used for processing regist ration projections when CAPP is not in use./n 143 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration CLASS rule For projections, the CLASS rule is only used when the AREASELECT rule is set to N. When the AREASELECT rule is set to N, the name of the class code found at the end of the area name is used. The CLASS rule can use numerical or alphabetical codes. However, the code must be used as the studen t's class code, and the area assigned to the student's program on SMAPROG must end with the same code. PRIADJFAC rule Use the PRIADJFAC rule to adjust the priority factor for processing. Enter 1 or 10. 10 is the default. The adjust factor is used to set the maximum area and the maximum over the class rules. The factor of 10 assumes that area priorities are numbered in increments of 10, such as 10, 20, 30, and so on. The factor of 1 assumes that area priorities are numbered in increments of 1, such as 1, 2, 3, and so on. Use External APIProjected registration processing can request data from external third party applications and receive a list of projected courses to be pr ocessed in Banner. This is done by setting up an external API when CAPP is not in use. External CodeInternal Code Internal Code Sequence NumberInternal Code GroupDescription P, N, A Default is PA is not used for projections AREASELECTREGPROJSTRUCTUs e name convention or priority. P = Priority, N = Name, A = AllA is not used for projections 01CLASS1REGPROJSTRUCT1st year class 02CLASS2REGPROJSTRUCT2nd year class 03CLASS3REGPROJSTRUCT3rd year class 04CLASS4REGPROJSTRUCT4th year class 1, 10 Default is 10PRIADJFACREGPROJSTRUCTPriority adjust factor 1 or 10/n 144 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Configure the external APIDo the following to set up the external API used to retrieve projected registration data from the third party application. 1.Create a new record for the external RESTful API code and description on the External API Information Validation Page (STVREST). For example, PRG - Third Party Connection for Projected Registration This code is used in step 2. 2.Define the RESTful API cont rols on the External API Connection Information Page (SOAREST). 2.1. Select the code created on STVREST. 2.2. Enter the username, password, and URL information used to connect to your third party APIs. 3.Update the RESTful API code on SOATERM. This step tells your registration process how to collect projected registration data. 3.1. Enter the term you wish to use. 3.2. Select the Projected Registration tab. 3.3. Enter the external API using the code defined on STVREST. 3.4. Save the changes. Use third party service The service needs to send all processed data based on the request criteria provided. The following minimum requirements must be met by your third party service provider. URLYour third party service should be exposed as a RESTful Service on the URL accessible by the Banner 9.x application. AuthenticationExternal API access requires Base64 encoding of the username and password. The third party service is expected to authenticate all incoming requests with the Base64 encoded username and password. The response is returned when the data is successfully validated, based on the credentials entered in SOAREST. Request criteriaThe Banner 9.x application will provide following criteria for the RESTful request. /n 145 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ResponseA JSON type of response is expected from the third party service. The Banner 9.x application will request "application/json " as the acceptToken in the request. JSONHere is the JSON information for criteria field, field attribute, and description. Criteria Field Field Attribute Description studentId String (9 char) Student™s ID, required. termCode String (6 char) Student™s term, required. program String (12 char) Student™s program, required. Criteria Field Field Attribute Description studentId String (9 char) Student™s ID, required. term String (6 char) Student™s term, required. mandatoryIndicatorString (1 char) ["Y", "N"] Mandatory Course Indicator, optional. Default is N. Program String (12 char) Student's program code, required. elective String (1 char) ["G", "E", null] Elective Course Indicator, optional. Valid values are: G - Generic, E - Elective, Null - Default. subject String (4 char) Subject Code, optional. Default is Null.courseNumberLowString (5 char) Course number low, optional. Default is Null. courseNumberHighString (5 char) Course number high, optional. Default is Null. When low and high are both populated, a range is indicated. High cannot exist without low. attribute String (4 char) Attribute Code, optional. Default is Null.level String (2 char) Level Code, optional. Default is Null./n 146 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration Sample JSON objectHere is an example of request criteria for the third party service. [{"attribute": null, "campus": null, "college": null, "courseNumberHigh": null, "courseNumberLow": "101", "department": null, "elective": null, "level": "UG", "mandatoryIndicator": "Y", "mostProbable": null, "program": "BA_LANG", "studentId": "PROTEST01", "subject": "SPAN", "term": "201410" }, {"attribute": null, "campus": null, "college": null, "courseNumberHigh": null, "courseNumberLow": "102", "department": null, "elective": null, "level": "UG", "mandatoryIndicator": "Y", "mostProbable": null, "program": "BA_LANG", "studentId": "PROTEST01", "subject": "ACCT", "term": "201410" mostProbable String (1 char) ["Y", "N", null] Most Probable Course Indicator, optional. Default is Null. campus String (3 char) Campus Code, optional. Default is Null.college String (2 char) College Code, optional. Default is Null.department String (4 char) Department Code, optional. Default is Null. Criteria Field Field Attribute Description /n 147 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration }]Processing noteWhen the Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) is run and data is retrieved from an external API, sometimes a delay occurs in the generation of the .lis and .log file files. In that case you will need to wait before you attemp t to open those files. This delay is caused when a connection timeou t exception takes place. This exception is listed in the .log file. The timeout takes place when SFPPROJ cannot access the URL configured for the external API code on the SOAREST page. The batch process will try to access the URL for a specific amount of time. If it is not successful, the timeout occurs. Administrative formsThe following Banner 8.x administrative fo rms are used with this functionality. ŁProjection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) ŁProjection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) These forms are only available in Banner Student 8.x . They can be accessed from the Course Projections Menu (PROJECTIONS) on the Student Menu (*STUDENT). Refer to the Banner Student 8.x Online Help for information on form se ctions and field definitions. Projection Configuration by Program Form (SFALPRO) This Banner 8.x form is used to set up projec tion filtering by program. It contains several blocks and a secondary window. ŁThe program for the rule is entered in the Key block. ŁThe parameters used with the rule are defined in the Parameters to Define the Term™s Rule block. The data can be filtered by the projection process. ŁCombinations of department, college, and subject are defined in the Parameters to Define First Courses block to iden tify courses as first courses. First courses are selected for projection witho ut consideration of the limits on maximum levels or maximum areas over student clas ses. Only the first maximum number of courses is selected for each rule defined in this block. At least one value of department, college, or subject must be defined for each rule. ŁThe most probable attributes for the progra m are viewed and maintained in the Most Probable Attribute window. Note for the window behavior When the Most Probable Attribute window is accessed from the Options Menu and a new attribute code is inserted and saved, and then the user performs a Rollback and re- /n 148 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration enters the window from the Options Menu, the inserted attribute is not displayed. The window is re-entered in query mode, and you need to perform an Execute Query function to display the record. When the window is accessed using Next Bl ock, the inserted attribute is displayed. Projection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ) This Banner 8.x form is used to view projec tion registration results for a student, term, and study path and then modify the returned list of projected courses if needed. ReportingThe following process and report are used with projected registration. ŁStudent Projection Process (SFPPROJ) ŁSchedule Planning Report (SFRPRES) Note: Reports and processes must be run from job submission in Banner 8.x. See the Banner Student Reports and Processes Handbook 8.7 for information on parameters and output samples. Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) The Student Projection Process (SFPPROJ) is a Java process used to produce projection results based on CAPP complianc e information. The list of projected courses for a student is used in Self-Service registration. This process takes C APP compliance results, generates the list of projected courses, applies filters, verifies prerequisites and corequisites, and mar ks the most probable courses for registration. Students are selected and processed by ID or population selection when CAPP compliance results exist for the term. Only students that match the selected college, major, and student type are selected. The CAPP compliance results for the primary program ar e used when study paths are not active. When study paths are active, CAPP comp liance results are used for each active program that needs to be processed for proj ections. When the Curriculum parameter is set to P, only primary curriculum records are processed. Not-met courses are identified from CAPP comp liance results from ea ch row of courses attached to areas and rules. ŁWhen the subject and course number are sp ecified, that course is included in the projection. /n 149 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Projected Registration ŁWhen a subject with a range of course number s is specified, all courses with the subject in the range of course numbers are included in the projection. ŁWhen only the subject is specified, no cour ses are included in the projection, but the subject is projected. ŁWhen a rule only includes attributes, no courses are included in the projection, but the attribute is projected. ŁWhen a rule only includes the course number, no courses are included in the projection, but the course number is projected. ŁWhen the rule description contains the el ective rule key specified on SOATERM, courses are marked as electives in the projec tion. Rules are designated as elective on the Projection Maintenance Form (SFAPROJ). Note: Lists of projected courses generated previously for the term are deleted when the process is run. Schedule Planning Report (SFRPRES)The Schedule Planning Report (SFRPRES) is a C process that produces a list of courses with the expected number of students to be regist ered in each active course in the Course Catalog. This can assist with schedule plan ning for the upcoming term. The numbers returned are based on the most probable courses for all available term projections. Historic enrollment data from two previous terms is included in the report, and courses are grouped by college and department. /n 150 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Self-Service RegistrationThis section discusses the Banner Stud ent Self-Service Registration pages. OverviewSelf-Service pages are delivered for use with Banner Student Registration. Perform the setup on the administrative pages before you use the Self-Service pages. The following introductory pages are displayed after the user logs in to Self-Service, if the pages are set up to do so, and the user has not previously provided the requested information. ŁTerms of Usage page ŁSecurity Question and Answer page ŁUpdate Ethnicity an d Race Survey page ŁForgot PIN page - This page is not available when CAS is in use. These pages are used with Self-S ervice registration processing. ŁRegistration Landing page ŁPersona Selection page - displayed based on selected path ŁSelect a Term - displayed based on selected path ŁPrepare for Registration ŁClass Search and Registration (Blocks, Plans, Projections, Structured) ŁView Registration Information ŁBrowse Classes - without login ŁBrowse Course Cata log - without loginSetup informationPlease refer to the following topics at the end of this chapter for setup used with Self- Service:ŁfiSet up the Registration Self-Service Page sfl contains information on setup needed on GTVSDAX, SOATERM, and so on to use the pages. ŁfiFaculty card setupfl contains information on how to set up the faculty card for use with the registration pages. /n 151 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Introductory pages Here is more detail on the in troductory Self-Service pages. Terms of Usage The Terms of Usage Page is displayed the first time you log in to Self-Service Registration and two conditions are true: the Accepted indicator is set to No on the Third Party Access Audit Page (GOATPAD), and the Display Usage Page indicator is checked on the Customize Web Rules Page ( twbkwrul.P_ModifyPgWebRules ) in Web Tailor. When the user selects Continue to accept the terms, the Accepted indicator is set to Yes on GOATPAD. This page is the same as the Banner Web General 8.x Self-Service page, Terms of Usage (twbkwbis.P_UsagePage ). The page details and setup can be found in the Banner Web for General User Guide in the fiTechnical Referencefl chapter, under the fiTerms of Usagefl topic. Security Question and AnswerThe Security Question and Answer Page is displayed when you log in to Self-Service Registration and the following condition is true: the Disable fiForgot PINfl indicator is set to No on the Enterprise PIN Preferences Page (GUAPPRF). The answers to the questions are stored on the Third Party Access Audit Page (GOATPAD). This page is similar to the Banner Web Gene ral 8.x Self-Service page, Security Question and Answer ( twbkwbis.P_SecurityQuestion ). Multiple questions are displayed on one page in 9.x, instead of answering o ne question per page as in 8.x. The page details and setup can be found in the Banner Web for General User Guide in the fiUsing Web Generalfl chapter, under the fiSecurity Questions and Answersfl topic. Update Race and Ethnicity Survey The Update Ethnicity and Race page is di splayed when you log in to Self-Service Registration and the following conditions are true: the Reporting Date value is set for the RESTARTDAT and REENDDATE GTVSDAX rules, and the system date falls within that range. You can click Ask Me Later to continue and bypass the page. The page will be displayed each time the user logs in during the date range until the survey is completed. The survey confirmation is displayed on the General Person Identification Page (SPAIDEN) with the Ethnicity and Race Confirmed indicator checked and the Confirmed Date field populated. This page is the same as the Banner Web General 8.x Self-Service page, Update Ethnicity and Race Survey ( bwgkomre.P_RaceSurvey ). The page details and the GTVSDAX setup can be found in the Banner Web for General User Guide in the fiTechnical Referencefl chapter, under the fiEthnicity and Race Survey Pagesfl topic. /n 152 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Forgot Password and Reset PasswordThis page is available when CAS is not in use. The Forgot Password and Reset Password pages can be used to assist with logging in when a student has forgotten his or her password/PIN or when the password/PIN has expired. The user-supplied security questions and answers are used to allow a password to be reset. The Forgot Password option is displayed as a link on the Login page. Users can do the following to reset a password. 1.The student enters the Banner ID in the User ID field, then selects the Forgot Password link.The system displays the Forgot Password page with the student™s user name and security questions displayed. 2.The student enters the answers to the security questions in the Answer fields, and then selects the Continue button. The system displays the Reset Password page for the student to reset his or her PIN. 3.The student enters the new password in the New Password field, then reenters the same password in the Re-enter New Password field.4.The student selects the Submit button. The system displays the Login page. This page is similar to the Banner Web General 8.x Self-Service page, Change PIN (twbkwbis.P_ChangePin ). The details for this page can be found in the Banner Web for General User Guide in the fiUsing Web Generalfl chapter, under the fiResetting Your PINfl topic.Forgot PIN and Security Question interactionWhen a Banner Self-Service user creates his/her own security questions and tries to reset the PIN on a Banner 9.x Self-Service page, the following error can occur: Security question and answers need to be defined . This occurs when Banner Student Registration 9.x is deployed as a stand-alone application with native authentication. External CodeInternal Code Internal Code GroupDescriptionReporting Date NOT USEDRESTARTDATSSMREDATERace/Ethn Survey Start DateFirst date the survey is to be displayed on the webNOT USEDREENDDATESSMREDATERace/Ethn Survey End Date Last date the survey is to be displayed on the web/n 153 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration When Banner Student Registration 9.x is dep loyed with Banner Student 8.x Self-Service, the user is able to reset the PIN from an 8.x Self-Service page. When Banner Student Registration 9.x is conf igured to use CAS authentication, the reset PIN functionality should not be enabled, as it is not currently supported. Registration pages This section describes the pages and paths used to perform registration. Registration Landing PageWhen a user logs in to Banner Student Self-S ervice Registration, he/she is taken to the Registration Landing page where a list of options is displayed. ŁBrowse Course Catalog Use this link to search on and browse through courses in the course catalog for potential registration or about which more information is needed. It is not necessary to log in to use this link. The path is as follows: ŁSelect a Term ŁBrowse Courses ŁSearch Results ŁPrepare for Registration Use this link to view the registration status for a student, update student term data, and complete pre-registration requirements. The path is as follows: ŁSelect a Term ŁRegistration Status ŁUpdate Student Term Data ŁPlan Ahead Use this link to create and manage student r egistration plans. The plans can be saved in the Plan Ahead path and then later used for registration in the Register for Classes path. In the Plan Ahead path, student registrati on plans can be created using the Browse Courses and Find Classes searches. View Sections can be used to select course sections. In the Degree Works tab, Degree Works plans can also be used to add courses or classes to the stud ent registration plans when third party planning is in use. /n 154 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Depending on whether different personas (facul ty, advisors, and so on) have access to create plans for students, the Plans Created by Others tab is also available for creating student registration plans. The Plan Ahead path is as follows for any login ID: ŁSelect a Term A non-student is required to enter a student ID and meet security credentials. ŁSelect a Plan - create, edit, or delete student registration plans, and list Degree Works plans ŁFind Classes - use search criteria to add courses or classes to the student registration plan summary ŁPlans Created by Others - use plans created by IDs other than the login ID to add courses or classes to the stud ent registration plan summary ŁDegree Works Plans - use the Degree Wor ks SEPs to add courses or view sections to add classes from Degree Works plans to the student registration plan summary ŁRegister for Classes Use this link to search for and register in classes. The user can also view and manage the class schedule. When this lin k is selected, the user is prompted to log in to continue. The path is as follows: ŁSelect a Term ŁRegister for Classes ŒFind Classes ŒEnter CRNs ŒPlans ŒBlocks ŒProjections ŒStructured ŒSchedule and Options ŁView Registration Information Use this link to view student schedules and ungraded classes. The path is as follows: ŁLook up a Schedule ŁActive Registrations ŁSchedule by Centric Period ŁBrowse Classes Use this link to search on and browse throug h class sections for potential registration or /n 155 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration about which more information is needed. It is not necessary to log in to use this link. The path is as follows: ŁSelect a Term ŁBrowse Classes ŁSearch Results The faculty card is availabl e from the following paths: ŁRegister for Classes ŁPlan Ahead ŁView Registration Information ŁBrowse Classes (sections) ŁBrowse Course Catalog Refer to the "Faculty Card" and "Faculty Card setup" topics for more information on using this card. Persona Selection page When you log in to Banner Student Self-Service Registration and multiple personas are in use for your account, you are taken to the Persona Selection page. The roles available for your user ID are displayed. Persona choices include: Student , Registrar , Faculty , Advisor , and Faculty and Advisor . You can choose one, click OK, and continue to the Registration Landing page. If your login ID has only one persona, you are not given this choice, and the persona functionality becomes transparent. This situation will apply to most st udents and faculty members, as they are only set up as a STUDENT persona or a FACULTY persona. If you are eligible, you can switch your persona at any time during your session from the Registration Landing page. The selected person a is displayed at the top of the page, to the left of the username. If you have multip le personas, and the persona in use does not have access to a specific page you are trying to view, you are prompted to change your role to continue. If you return to the Registration Landing page and you have multiple personas, the displayed persona becomes a link. Select the link to access the Persona Selection page and change your persona. Select a Term Use this page to select a term or date range for which you wish to perform a task. You can select a term for a class or course search, to proceed with registration, or to work with registration plans. Use the Continue button to move to the next page. When you search on and register in a date range, changes to the registration status (registered, dropped, withdrawn and so on) and updates to classes are performed within the term flow, the same as in Banner 8.x. Date ranges return terms that are open for /n 156 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration registration within the specified dates. Th e SOBTERM rules from the maximum effective term are applied to all terms in the date range search. Date ranges are only available for the STUDENT persona type code. Note: When a term date range is used (where start and end dates include multiple terms), th e rules defined for the last term in the date range are used to process error messaging for the student. The SVQ_TERM_REGISTRATION view presents the terms that are open for registration. This includes the WEBTRMDTE rule on GTVSDAX used to display term dates in the description. This set of fields is displayed fo r the class search for registration. Fields Descriptions How would you like to search?Radio group used to select search for a term or a date range. Choices are: Term or Date Range . STUDENT persona only. Terms Open for Registration Displayed when Term is selected for th e search. Select a term from the list of available terms. STUDENT persona only Start Date Displayed when Date Range is selected for the search. Enter the start date of the course. STUDENT persona only End Date Displayed when Date Range is selected for the search. Enter the end date of the course. STUDENT persona only Study Path Study path for registration. Displayed when Term is selected for the search. Select a valid study path value from the list. When a term is selected that does not have a study path associated with it, this field defaults to None .When study paths are required, you must select one to continue with registration. When study paths are optional, you can select one or select None to continue. This field is not displayed if study paths are not enabled for the term. Holds Password.Password from SOATERM used to override holds that prevent registration. This field is for registrar use only. /n 157 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Name and ID SearchUsers who are administrators and faculty me mbers or advisors can search on student names and Banner IDs for a term on the Select a Term page in Self-Service. This allows the user to perform a quick search on a student for a term without leaving the page and then continue with registration. The search criteria displays changes depending on the user™s persona type code, such as REGISTRAR , FACULTY, ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR .The registrar or administrator can enter a partia l ID and view a list of results. The registrar can then change the term for the student, change the study path for the student, or change both and proceed with registration. The user who is either a faculty member, an advisor, or both, can also enter a partial ID and view a list of results. The faculty member or advisor may be limited to searching for their assigned students or advisees. The ALLADV , ALLFAC , and REGADVISEE GTVSDAX rules for the FACWEB internal code group control whether the facu lty member or advisor can search beyond their classes or advisees. The faculty member or advisor must enter the student's password to access the Self-S ervice registration pages. A user with the REGISTRAR persona type code can use the student™s ID to access student-related pages and change the term for the student, change the study path for the student, or change both and then proceed with registration. A password is required for a user who has a persona type code of FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR , in order to access student information. The user can then perform actions on a student™s record such as adding or dropping classes. However, an advisor may have limited access and permissions based on your policies. Once you have selected a student from the search results and viewed the registration summary information on the Find Classes page, you can click on New Search at the top of the page. This returns you to the Select a Term page, where you can perform a search on another student. The term you were using is defaulted into the page. Confidential and Deceased notificationsWhen a user searches on and selects a student, the CONFIDENTIAL and DECEASED notifications are displayed, based on the settings on SPAPERS. The REGISTRAR persona (administrative) can view and process information for a student who is marked as CONFIDENTIAL or DECEASED . The notifications are displayed next to the student™s name on the Self-Service pages. Alternate PIN Alternate PIN for the user. Displayed when Term is selected for the search. STUDENT persona only The field is displayed but is disabled if an SPAAPIN record is not assigned to the ID. The field is active and required when a record is assigned to the ID on the Alternate Personal Identification Number Page (SPAAPIN). Fields Descriptions /n 158 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration The FACULTY , ADVISOR, or FACULTY AND ADVISOR personas can also view and process information for a student who is marked as CONFIDENTIAL . However, these personas cannot process a student marked as DECEASED or advance to another Self- Service page. When the FACULTY , ADVISOR, or FACULTY AND ADVISOR personas select a student marked as both CONFIDENTIAL and DECEASED, the DECEASED notification takes precedence. Only the DECEASED notification is displayed, and the following message is displayed: You cannot process this student at this time. Please contact the student records department .The FACADVSESARCHDECEASED rule on the Information Te xt Editor Page (GUAINFO) contains the text used for the DECEASED notification message. This text can be re- configured at your institution. Field display by personaHere are the fields the user with the REGISTRAR persona type code can use for a student search. Here are the fields the user with the FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR persona type codes can use for student searches. Fields Descriptions Search by Radio group used to search on a student by ID or name for the term. Values are ID, Name .Untitled (Search Criteria)Field used to enter the ID or name search criteria. ŁFor an ID, enter at least four characters. ŁFor a name, enter data in the format last name, first name or initial, such as Jones, M .Untitled (Results)Displays list of students returned for the search by name and ID. You can select a student from the list and continue. Alternate student names are presented in the results. Third party IDs are not included at this time. Fields Descriptions Search by Radio group used to search on a student by ID or name for the term. Values are ID, Name .When Name is selected, the Search On field is displayed to the left of the Search by radio group. /n 159 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Prepare for Registration Use this page to view the registration status for a student or to update the student data for a term. Use the Registration Status tab and th e Update Student Term Data tab to access this information. This page is available for users with the STUDENT and REGISTER persona type codes. Note: The Update Student Term data tab is only displayed when it has been activated. When it has not been activated, only the Registration Status tab is available on this page. Registration Status The Registration Status tab di splays information about items that affect a student's ability to register for a selected term. It reports ti me-ticket assignments or time control messages, holds, academic standing, student status, study path status, calculated student classification, and primary curriculum details. In addition, it displays a summary of any hours already earned. The information is taken fr om the student record that is currently in effect for the selected term. Curriculum data elements are displayed for the current and active primary curriculum, as well as for any current and ac tive secondary curricula in effect for the term selected. Example status messages could be: Search onField that displays a specific type of name search based on the persona in use. Select the value that applies to your persona. ŁFor Advisor, yo u can search on All Students or My Advisees .ŁFor Faculty, you can search on All Students or My Students .ŁFor Faculty And Adviso r, you can search on All Students , My Students , My Advisees , or Both.Untitled (Search Criteria)Field used to enter the ID or name search criteria. ŁFor an ID, enter at least four characters. ŁFor a name, enter data in the format last name, first name or initial, such as Jones, M .Untitled (Results)Displays list of results for the search by name and ID. You can select a student from the list and continue. Alternate student names are presented in the results. Third party IDs are not included at this time. PasswordStudent password. You must enter the password to continue. Fields Descriptions /n 160 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration ŁYour student status permits registration. ŁYour overall academic status permits registration. ŁYou have no holds which prevent registration. ŁTime tickets do not allow registration at this time. An error is displayed if registration is pr evented due to study path status, academic standing status, or combined academic st anding and progress evaluation status.When registration is prevented due to the student's overall academic standing codes, general student status, or override standing, any study path statuses that prevent registration are not displayed. It is assumed that no study path can be used during registration when the student's overall standing or status prevents registration. The SVQ_SOVLCUR_TERM view presents current and active curriculum records by term. Refer to the fiRegistration Status tabfl topic at the end of this sectio n for more information on status message configuration and conditions for message display. Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description for which the registration status information is displayed. The following fields/messages are displayed in the Registration Status information. Student Status Message indicating whet her the student™s status affects his or her ability to regist er for the selected term. Academic StandingMessage indicati ng whether the student™s academic standing affects his or her ability to register for the selected term. Combined Academic Standing Message indicating whether the student™s combined academic standing affects his or her ability to register for the selected term. Study Path Status Message indicating the study path in which the student is eligible to register when study paths are in use. Holds Message indicating whether or not registration holds exist for the student that prevent registration. Class Standing Message indicating t he student™s classification for registration (such as, Freshman , Year 3 , and so on). Time TicketsMessage indicating the time controls by date and time range during which the student can register. If registration is not permitted, the message Time tickets do not allow registration at this time is displayed. If no time ticket has been assigned, the message You have no Registration Time Ticket. You may register at any time is displayed. /n 161 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Permit OverrideMessage indicating the permit override for the CRN, subject and course number, course title, and permit override type. Earned Hours Message indicating the student™s earned hours information by student level, institutional or transfer hours, and number of hours for each level in Academic History. The following fields are displayed in the Primary Curriculum Information. Primary CurriculumName of the student™s current active primary curriculum. If the student has multiple current active primary curricula, the set of fields will be displayed multiple times. (Primary) Study PathStudy path associ ated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Level Student level associ ated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) College Name of the college associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Degree Name of the degree associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) ProgramName of the program associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Campus Name of the campus associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Catalog TermCatalog term code and description associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Admit TermAdmit term code an d description associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Admit TypeAdmit type code and description associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. (Primary) Major Name of the major associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple majors. (Primary) DepartmentName of the department associated with the current active primary learner curriculu m. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple departments. (Primary) Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations. Fields Descriptions /n 162 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration (Primary) Minor Name of the minor associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple minors. (Primary) ConcentrationName of the base concentration for the current active primary learner curriculum. This concentration is not attached to any major. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple concentrations. (Primary) Other field of studyName of any other field of study associated with the current active primary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study. The following fields are displayed in the Secondary Curriculum Information. Secondary CurriculumName of the student™s current active secondary curriculum. If the student has multiple current active secondary curricula, the set of fields will be displayed multiple times.(Secondary) Study PathStudy path associ ated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. (Secondary) Level Student level a ssociated with the current active secondary curriculum.(Secondary) CollegeName of the college associated with the current active secondary curriculum.(Secondary) DegreeName of the degree associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. (Secondary) ProgramName of the program associated with the current active secondary curriculum.(Secondary) CampusName of the college associated with the current active secondary curriculum.(Secondary) Catalog TermCatalog term code and description associated with the current active secondar y learner curriculum. (Secondary) Admit TermAdmit term code and description associated with the current active secondar y learner curriculum. (Secondary) Admit TypeAdmit type code and description associated with the current active secondar y learner curriculum. (Secondary) MajorName of the major associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple majors.(Secondary) DepartmentName of the majo r and department associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if th ere are multiple departments. Fields Descriptions /n 163 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Update Student Term Data The Update Student Term Data tab allows students to update the major, educational goal, and employment expectation information stored in the general student record (SGASTDN). The major, educational goal, an d employment expectation can be modified for any term in which the student has not alre ady registered or changed this information. When no changes are needed, a message is displayed, and the student can exit from the page. If data is successfully changed, a message is displayed that the update was successful. If a student tries to access this information for a term for which changes have already been made or in which registration has alre ady occurred, the page is displayed as read only, and the student is alerted that no ch anges are required at this time. If a student accesses a term for which no student record (SGASTDN) exists, no major is available to be selected. Inactive students cannot update their term data. For example, when a student™s general student record (SGASTDN) has the Student Status code of Inactive Due to Graduation , and the Allow Registration indicator on ST VSTST is set to N for the status code, the student is not allowed to update the term data. The Update Student Term Data tab is delivered in a disabled state. To enable/display the tab, set the updateStudentTermData item to Y in the StudentRegistrationSsb_configuration.groovy file. Set the updateStudentTermData item to N to disable/not display the tab. The display can be turned on or off as you choose. If you do not wish to use the page or do not allow students to make these updates, you can turn the display off. For more information on enabling this tab, please refer to the Banner Student Registration Installation Guide 9.x .The order in which the Major, Educational Goal , and Employment Expectation fields are displayed on the page can be customized using the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). This configuration replaces the GTVSDAX rules used in Banner 8.x. (Secondary) Major Concentration Name of the concentration associated with the major for the current active secondary le arner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple major concentrations. (Secondary) MinorName of the minor associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple minors. (Secondary) Concentration Name of the base concentration for the secondary learner curriculum. This field is disp layed multiple times if there are multiple concentrations. (Secondary) Other field of studyName of any other field of study associated with the current active secondary learner curriculum. This field is displayed multiple times if there are multiple other fields of study. Fields Descriptions /n 164 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Class Search and RegistrationUse this page to perform the following tasks: Łsearch on classes Łselect CRNs for registration Łview plans Łperform block registration Łperform projected registration Łperform structured registration Łview a schedule and options Fields Descriptions Major Student™s major for the term. When the major is updated, the SORLCUR and SORLFOS tables are updated. This field is required. The majors listed for selection are determined by the curriculum checking rules on SOACTRL. ŁWhen Perform Curriculum Checking is set to Yes , the majors listed will only be choices within that student™s existing curriculum rule. ŁWhen Perform Curriculum Checking is set to No, all majors with the Major indicator checked on STVMAJR will be listed.Educational GoalStudent™s educational goal for the term. When the educational goal is updated, the SGBSTDN record is updated. The display of this field can be configured using the Overall Page and Field Conf iguration Page (SOAWSCR). Employment ExpectationsStudent™s employm ent expectation for the term. When the employment expectation is updated, the SGBSTDN record is updated. The display of this field can be configured using the Overall Page and Field Conf iguration Page (SOAWSCR). SubmitButton used to submit changes for the student. /n 165 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Find Classes The Find Classes section of the page allows you to perform basic and advanced searches for class information. Use the Find Classes tab to access the se arch criteria. The SVQ_CLASSSEARCH view facilitates search es on class sections. Note: Course abbreviations must use all capital letters. Mixed case and lower case are not used. For example, the name fiARTfl is correct. The names fiArtfl or fiartfl are not correct. Basic Search CriteriaUse any of the following criteria to perform a search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for fia llfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to re-enter the search criteria. Fields are delivered to display for a basic se arch or an advanced search. Fields can be rearranged between the two search areas by modifying the elements on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). Advanced Search CriteriaSelect the Advanced link to access this section. You can use the following criteria to perform an advanced search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for Fields Descriptions Term Term selected for the search.Subject Course subject. Select one or more values from the list. Course Number Course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword Enter partial words you want to find, using wildcards on the front and back of the string, such as %string% . The search uses an AND operator. The search returns courses that match the pa rtial keywords entered. For example, if you were searching for MATH 203, the following strings would find a match: †Ath 03 †Mat 20 †At 0 The following strings would not find a match: †Math 444 †Ath 4 †English 203 /n 166 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration fiallfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to search again. Fields Descriptions Term Term selected for the search.Subject Course subject and description. Select one or more values from the list. Course NumberCourse number. Select a value from the list. Keyword Enter partial words you want to find, using wildcards on the front and back of the string, such as %string% . The search uses an AND operator. The search returns courses that match the pa rtial keywords entered. For example, if you were searching for MATH 203, the following strings would find a match: †Ath 03 †Mat 20 †At 0 The following strings would not find a match: †Math 444 †Ath 4 †English 203 Instructor Course instructor and description. Select one or more values from the list. Subject and Course Number Course subject and course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword (With All Words)Enter all the words you want to find. The search uses AND logic. Sections returned contain all of the words entered. For example, if you enter History American , only classes with both History and American in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Latin American History, History of the American West, or American Cultures with a subj ect description of History. /n 167 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Keyword (With Any Word)Enter any of the words you want to find. The search uses OR logic. Sections returned contain at least one of the words entered. For example, if you enter History , any classes with History in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. If you enter History Math , any classes with History or Math in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. Keyword (Exact Phrase)Enter the exact phrase you want to find. Sections returned contain the exact phrase entered. For example, if you enter Introduction to , any classes with that phrase are returned, such as Introduction to Accounti ng, Introduction to Math. Keyword (Without the Word) Enter the word you do not want to find. This option must be used with another Keyword se arch field, such as All, Any, Partial, or Phrase. Sections returned contain the words entered in the Keyword (With Any Word) and Keyword (With All Words) fields but do not contain the word entered here. For example, if you enter History as any keyword and American as the word to exclude, the search returns sections with History in any of the fields searched by keywords, but none of the sections returned includes American .AttributeCourse attribute and description. Select one or more values from the list. CampusCourse campus and description. Select one or more values from the list. LevelCourse level and description. Select one or more values from the list. BuildingsBuilding in wh ich course meets with description. Select one or more values from the list. CollegeCourse college and descr iption. Select one or more values from the list. DepartmentsCourse department and description. Select one or more values from the list. Instructional MethodsCourse instructional method and description. Select one or more values from the list. Fields Descriptions /n 168 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Schedule Type Course schedule type and description. Select from the list.Duration Course duration, for open learning courses only. Enter a numerical value and choose a duration unit from the list, for example a numerical value of 4 and unit value of weeks.Part of Term Course part of term and description. Select one or more values from the list. Title Course title. Enter the complete course title for the search.Sessions Course session and description. Select one or more values from the list. Course NumberCourse number. Course Number RangeCourse number range with from and to numbers Credit Hour RangeCourse credit hour range with from and to hours Meeting Days: MondayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Monday. Meeting Days: TuesdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Tuesday. Meeting Days: WednesdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Wednesday. Meeting Days: ThursdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Thursday. Meeting Days: FridayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Friday. Meeting Days: SaturdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Saturday. Meeting Days: SundayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Sunday. Start Time (On or after)Course start time with hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Select values from the lists. End Time (On or after)Course end time with hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Select values from the lists. Open Sections OnlyCheck box used to indicate that only sections with available seats should be returned by the search. This works with the settings on SOATERM. Fields Descriptions /n 169 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Find Classes Results This section of the page displays the results of the search when the Select a Term page radio group was set to Term and then the class search was performed. Use the Add button to add a class to the summary in preparation for registration. Note: The display of classes is not dependent on the setting of the Print on Schedule check box on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Page (STVRSTS). The display of search results for linked clas ses is dependent on the configuration of the Course Details window on SOAWSCR. If you do not want linked course s to display in the Course Details, they will not be displayed in the search results. If you do want linked courses to be displayed in the Course Details, they will be di splayed in the search results. The schedule type information is always displa yed as part of the title information when the Displayed indicator is checked on SOAWSCR. The setting of the Display Number field does not have any effect on the display order on the page. Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description for the term in which the course is offered. Title, Schedule TypeCourse title. Schedule type is listed below the course title if it is configured for display. SubjectSubject code.Subject DescriptionCourse subject description. Course NumberCourse number. SectionSection number. Hours Course credit hours. CRNCourse reference number. Term Course term and description. Instructor Course instructor or instructors. Meeting Times Course meeting inform ation, including meeting days, times, buildings, and rooms. Campus Course campus. Status Course status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain. /n 170 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Find Classes Results - Linked Sections Use this section of the page to review groups of linked sections for the course in the Find Classes Results display. You can add the linked sections by group instead of one at a time using the Add All button.You can use the Panels button at the bottom of the page to expand or hide the schedule and summary information. View LinkedButton used to view groups of linked sections for the course in a separate page, where you can select the Add All button to add a specific group of linked sections to the registration summary. AddButton used to add the course to the summary, in preparation for registration. This is displayed for courses that were searched on with the Select a Term page set to search on a term. SelectCheck box used to select an open learning course and add it to the summary when the Submit button is clicked. This is displayed for courses that were searched on with the Select a Term page set to search on a date range. Fields Descriptions Back to Search ResultsButton used to return to the Fi nd Classes Results display. TermTerm code and description for the term in which the course with the linked sections is offered. Title, Schedule TypeCourse title for the course with linked sections that was selected in the Find Classes Results display. Schedule type is listed below the course title if it is configured for display. CRNCourse reference number of the course with linked sections that was selected in the Find Classes Results display. The following fields are in the detail for the linked sections. TitleTitle of the linked section. SubjectSubject code for the linked section. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description for the linked section. Course NumberCourse numb er for the linked section. SectionSection number of the linked section. HoursCourse credit hours for the linked section. Fields Descriptions /n 171 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Confirm Your Selections window When you search by date range instead of term, and use the Select check box and the Submit button in the Find Classes Results to add those courses to the summary, this window is displayed. Use the Submit button in this window to proceed with registration or the Cancel button to close the window. CRNCourse reference number for the linked section. TermTerm and description for the linked section. InstructorCourse instructor or instructors for the linked section. Meeting TimesCourse meeting inform ation, including meeting days, times, buildings, and room s for the linked section. CampusCourse campus for the linked section. StatusCourse status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain in the linked section. Add AllButton used to add a specific group of linked sections for the course to the registration summary. When this button is selected for a group of linked sections, it is disabled fo r the other groups of linked sections displayed for the course. The linked sections are added to the registration summary with a status of Pending . If the linked sections are removed from the registration summary, the button is enabled again for the groups of linked sect ions for the course. Fields Descriptions Term Term in which course is offered. Course Title Course title. Subject Course subject. Course NumberCourse number. SectionCourse section number. Credit Hours Course credit hours. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule Type Course schedule type. Study Path Study path associated with the course. Duration Unit Course duration unit, such as weeks, months, and so on. Start Date Course start date. Fields Descriptions /n 172 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Schedule information The schedule information is displayed in the lower section of the page. It consists of the Schedule view, the Schedule Details view, and the Summary of the schedule. Schedule viewThe Schedule View shows the class schedule by day and hour in the bottom left section of the page. Use the Schedule tab to display this view. Use the Panels button to display and hide the schedule and summary information. The display of registered courses for the selected term is controlled by the Print On Schedule check box on the Course Registration Status Code Validation Page (STVRSTS). Only courses with statuses for which the Print On Schedule check box is selected are included when the schedule is disp layed. It is recommended that statuses for dropped courses should not have the Print On Schedule check box selected, as listing dropped courses on the schedule may cause confusion. The Schedule information is displayed for the following tabs: Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Plans, Blocks, Projections, Structured, Sc hedule and Options, and Schedule by Centric Period. This information is updated as changes are made. Schedule Details view The Schedule Details View shows the class schedule in detailed format in the bottom left of the page. The registration status displa yed here is updated when changes are made to courses in the Summary section. Use the Sche dule Details tab to display this view. Use the Panels button to display and hide the schedule and summary information. The Schedule Details informat ion is displayed for the follo wing tabs: Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Plans, Blocks, Projections, Structured , Schedule and Option s, and Schedule by Centric Period. This information is updated as changes are made. Summary of the scheduleThis Summary section of the page on the bo ttom right shows the classes selected for registration and the student™s existing schedu le. Think of this area as a shopping cart End DateCourse end date. StatusCourse registration status. ActionAction to be taken for the course, such as register for the course, waitlist the course, remove the course from the summary, drop the course, drop the course with a penalty, or none (no action to be taken), and so on. Select a value from the list. This value comes from the Action Description field on STVRSTS.Fields Descriptions /n 173 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration where you can place the courses you wish to consider for registration. As courses are added, the status of Pending is displayed. Use the Submit button to continue and register for the courses. Use the Panels button to display and hide the schedule and summary information. If you attempt to leave the Summary section while you have pending courses for registration, you are prompted to stay and continue or leave and not retain your changes. When you submit a course for registration, all registration errors are displayed in the Notification Center. You do not need to correc t an error and then register again and then correct the next error that is displayed. You can view the course details and see what each error requires (such as restrictions, prerequisi tes, and so on) in or der to continue with registration for that course. The Summary information is displayed for the following ta bs: Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Plans, Blocks, Projections, and Structured. This information is updated as changes are made. Here are the fields in the registration summary. Fields Descriptions Course Title Course title. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for: ŁClass Details ŁBookstore Links ŁCourse Description ŁSyllabus ŁAttributes ŁRestrictions ŁFaculty/Meeting Times ŁEnrollment/Watilist ŁCorequisites ŁPrerequisites ŁMutual Exclusion ŁCross Listed Courses ŁLinked Courses ŁFees ŁCatalog All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Details Course subject, course number, section number. Hours Course credit hours. /n 174 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Enter CRNsUse this section of the page to enter CRNs directly and add them to the class summary. You can add up to ten CRNs at a time using the Add Another CRN link, and then click the Add to Summary button. Use the Enter CRNs tab to access this information. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule TypeCourse schedule type. This is displayed in the Find Classes Results and Find Classes - Linked Sections summary information. StatusCourse registration status. ActionAction to be taken for the course, such as register for the course, waitlist the course, remove the course from the summary, drop the course, drop the course with a penalty, drop the course and delete the record, or none (no action to be taken), and so on. Select a value from the list.This value comes from the Action Description field on STVRSTS.Total Hours RegisteredTotal registration hours for the courses in the summary. Total Hours Billing Total billing hour s for the courses in the summary. Total Hours CEU Total continuing education units for the courses in the summary. Total Hours Min Total minimum registration hours for the courses in the summary. Total Hours Max Total maximum registration hours for the courses in the summary. Conditional Add and DropCheck box used to indicate that all changes to the schedule are required for registration. This check box is displayed in the Summary section of Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Bloc ks, and Projections when the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator is checked for the term on SOATERM. Submit Button used to submit the schedule for registration. Fields Descriptions CRNCourse reference number and description. Add Another CRN Link used to display additional CRN fields.Fields Descriptions /n 175 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. Confirm Your Dates When a CRN is entered for an open learni ng course in the Enter CRNs section, a secondary window is displayed. Use this windo w to view the course information with the permitted start and end dates. En ter the date for when the course will be officially started, and the expected date of completion will be populated by the system based on the duration. Use the Confirm button to save the changes or the Cancel button to close the window. Register for Classes path - administrative view When you are logged in as an administrator (persona of REGISTRAR ), a more detailed view of the summary section is displayed fo r Find Classes Results and Enter CRNs in the Register for Classes path. You can expand the summary full page width and view course information that reflects the Course Informati on section of the Student Course Registration Page (SFAREGS). Note: You can continue to use the 8.x version of SFAREGS for registration processing while development of the Self-Service administrative view is in progress. However, you cannot use the same student for registration in 8.x and 9.x at the same time. Add to SummaryButton used to add CRNs to the summary. Fields Descriptions Course Title Course title for the open learning course. Subject Course subject for the open learning course. Course Number Course number for the open learning course. CRNCourse reference number for the open learning course. SectionCourse section number for the open learning course. Duration Course duration for the open learning course. Start Date Permitted start date range is displayed. Enter the selected start date for the open learning course. End Date Permitted end date range is displayed. Enter the selected end date for the open learning course. RemoveClick Remove to remove the course from the summary of pending courses for registration. Fields Descriptions /n 176 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Here is some information on how an administrator can override fatal errors in Self-Service Registration. When a CRN is entered, and fatal errors are encountered, all existing errors are displayed in the Notification Center. The errors can be overridden using one of two options in the Override field in the administrative view. ŁOverride all possible errors - This options sets all of the error flags in the SFRSTCR record to Overridden .ŁOverride only existing fatal errors - This option sets the related error flag in the SFRSTCR record to Overridden .For example, an institution may not have ente red prerequisites associ ated with sections at the time of registration. The fatal erro r rule for prerequisites on SOATERM may have been applied later, after registration for these classes has already taken place. ŁWhen Override only existing fatal errors has been selected, a batch process can be run that checks prerequisites and corequisites. The student IDs with Override only existing fatal errors selected or those student IDs having no fatal errors are shown on the report. The errors can be resolved on SFAREGS by override or deletion. ŁWhen Override all possible errors has been selected, the associated student IDs are not shown on the report. Fields Descriptions Course Title Course title. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for: ŁClass Details ŁBookstore Links ŁCourse Description ŁSyllabus ŁAttributes ŁRestrictions ŁFaculty/Meeting Times ŁEnrollment/Watilist ŁCorequisites ŁPrerequisites ŁMutual Exclusion ŁCross Listed Courses ŁLinked Courses ŁFees ŁCatalog All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. /n 177 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Details Course description and subject code, course number, section number, and CRN. Campus Campus code of the campus where the course is offered. Part of Term Part of term code for the course. Schedule Type Schedule type code for the course. Instructional MethodInstruct ional method code for the course, if one exists. Registration Date Date of registration for the course. Status Course registration status type for the Action field.The status type describes the course registration status code. This field is display only and represents the value defined for the status code in STVRSTS. Action Action to be taken for the course, such as register for the course, waitlist the course, remove the course from the summary, drop the course, drop the course with a penalty, drop the course and delete the record, or none (no action to be taken), and so on. Select a value from the list.This value comes from the Action Description field on STVRSTS.You have the option to perform a combined drop and delete, where the course is dropped and the record is deleted, or you can drop the course and retain the record in the database. Credit Hours Course credit hours. When the fiifl tooltip is displayed, you can view a variable credit hours range for the course, such as 3 to 4, and reset the hours, such as to 3.Bill HoursCourse billing hours. When the fiifl tooltip is displayed, you can view a variable billing hours range for the course, such as 3 to 4 , and reset the hours, such as to 3.Attempted HoursStudent™s attempted hours for the course. The field is populated by the existing SFTREGS_CREDIT_HR_HOLD value when the STVRSTS_ATTEMPTED_HRS_IND is set to Y.Time Status HoursStudent ™s time status hours fo r the course that will be used in the time status calculation. The field is populated by the existing SFTREGS_CREDIT_HRS_HOLD value when the STVRSTS_INCL_TMST_IND is set to Y.Fields Descriptions /n 178 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Grade Mode Grade mode code and description for the course. This can be changed using the pulldown list of values. Approval ReceivedCheckbox used to indicate that the student has received the appropriate instructor or advisor approval needed to register for the class. This field is used when the Special Approval indicator is set on SSASECT, and the Approval radio group is set to Fatal on SOATERM in the Section Options. OverrideCourse registration restriction override. This value can be changed using the pulldown list of values when fatal errors exist. When no fatal errors exist, the pulldown list is disabled, and no values are displayed. You can choose to override all possible registration errors, override only fatal errors, or not override any errors. When multiple errors are displayed in the Notification Center, you can ov erride all of the errors at one time, instead of overriding each error separately. Values are: †None ŁOverride all possible errors - sets all error flags in the SFRSTCR record to Overridden, saved to the database as ALLŁOverride only existing fatal errors - sets the related error flag in the SFRSTCR record to Overridden, saved to the database as YLevel Student level code and description. This value can be changed using the pulldown list of values. Study Path Study paths available to the student. This value can be changed using the pulldown list of values. Registration Status Registration status code and description, such as RE, Registered. Total Hours RegisteredTotal registration hours for the courses in the summary. Total Hours BillingTotal billing hour s for the courses in the summary. Total Hours CEUTotal continuing education units for the courses in the summary. Total Hours MinTotal minimum registration hours for the courses in the summary. Total Hours MaxTotal maximum registration hours for the courses in the summary. SubmitButton used to submit the schedule for registration. Fields Descriptions /n 179 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Plans - Plan Ahead path The Plan Ahead path is selected on the Registration Landing page. The Select a Term page is then displayed with terms that are available for use with planning, based on the setup on SOATERM. (The Term open for Self-Service planning indicator is checked for the term.) When the student selects a term, the Select a Plan page is displayed, and the student (or other users with personas that are granted security access) can create new student registration plans, edit or delete existing pl ans, or view plans from Degree Works for the term, based on the interface configured on SOAREST and the settings on SOATERM. (The Check third party degree audit system plan indicator is checked on SOATERM.) Plan Ahead - Select a PlanThe Select a Plan tab displays the term, t he maximum number of plans you can have based on the Maximum plans for term value defined on SOATERM, and a listing of any student registration plans created for the term. Existing student registration plans are displayed for the term with the plan name and the user (and persona) who created the plan. These plans are displayed in an expanded view. You can create a new plan if the maximum number of plans has not been reached. You can also delete or edit plans as needed. Use the Create New Plan button to build a new student registration plan by searching on courses and then viewing class sections, if sect ions have been made available in planning on SOATERM. (The Allow adding course sections to plan indicator is checked.) A plan name must be entere d to save the plan. Use the Delete or Edit buttons to remove or modify an existing plan. When you choose to edit a student registration plan , the selected plan is displa yed in the Summary section of the page. New courses or sections found in the course search or through other options can be added to the plan summary. You can remove courses or sections from the plan using the Action pulldown. Remove is displayed as an option if the course or section has not been saved in the plan. Delete is displayed as an option if the course or section has been saved in the plan. The Select a Plan tab can also display existing Degree Works Student Educational Plans (SEPs) for the term. Degree Works plans are always displayed in a list below existing student registration plans on the Plan Ahead - Select a Plan page. To view details of a Degree Works plan, the Degree Works tab must be selected. Degree Works plans cannot be edited. However, once you decide to edit existing student registra tion plans or create new plans, the Degree Works tab will displa y the Degree Works S EPs, and you can add courses that exist in Degree Wo rks plans to your plan summary. Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description of the term in which the plan is active. /n 180 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Create New Plan Button used to create a new student registration plan. This takes you to Find Classes with the basic and advanced searches. The plan summary is also displayed for the student registration plan. PlanStudent registration plan name entered by the user or Degree Works (SEP) plan name generated by the third party degree audit system interface. Created by and PersonaUser who created the plan. The persona is displayed when plans are created by a different login ID user. A link to the faculty card is available from the user name when the person is a faculty member. My Preferred Plan/Make Preferred Text and links displayed when preferred plans are in use. The preferred plan displays the notation fiMy Preferred Planfl. Other plans display a link for Make Preferred that can be selected to change the non-preferred plan to be the preferred plan. This option is only available to students. Approved/Approve This Plan/Remove Approval Text and links displayed when a plan has been approved by a faculty member or advisor. Multiple plans can be approved. The approved plan displays the notation fiApprovedfl. Approved plans display a link for Remove Approval that can be selected to unapprove the plan. Unapproved plans display a link for Approve This Plan that can be selected to approve the plan. This option is only available to faculty members or advisors. Title Course title. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Details Course subject, course number, and section number. Hours Course hours. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule Type Course schedule type. Fields Descriptions /n 181 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Instructor Course instructor or instructors. Grade Mode Course grade mode. NoteButton used to view a note added about the overall student registration plan or notes associated with courses or classes in the plan. A check mark indicates data exists for the note. Notes can only be entered or updated when a new plan is created or an existing plan is edited. Otherwise, notes are display only. Degree Works plan notes cannot be edited. Delete Button used to remove a plan and all associated courses. Only the plan creator can delete the plan. Degree Works (SEP) plans cannot be deleted. You can only add classes or sections to your student registration plan summary from a Degree Works plan that is displayed in the Degree Works tab. EditButton used to access the class search when modifying an existing plan. Only the plan creator can edit the plan. Degree Works (SEP) plans cannot be edited. You can only add classes or sections to your student registration plan summary from a Degree Works plan that is displayed in the Degree Works tab. Total Planned HoursTotal planned hours for the courses in the plan for the term.Number of Degree Works PlansNumber and list of plans found and loaded from Degree Works. Degree Works plans are only shown when third party plans are set up to display on SOATERM, the interface is set up on SOAREST, and Degree Works plans exist for the student and term. (The Check third party degree audit system plan indicator is checked, and the Display Third Party Plans in registration indicator is checked on SOATERM.) When you create a new plan or edit an existing plan, you can access the Degree Works tab to add courses from the Degree Works plan to the student registration plan summary. Fields Descriptions /n 182 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Plan Ahead - Find Classes Search and Results This view of Plan Ahead displays the basi c and advanced searches you can use to find the courses and/or sections to add to the Summary section of the student registration plan. Find Classes is accessed using the Create New Plan button or the Edit button when editing an existing stud ent registration plan. You can view the Schedule, Schedule Details, and Summary sections for the plan. When the Find Classes - Search Results data is di splayed, the following options are available. ŁUse the Search Again button to perform a new search. ŁUse the Add Course button to add the course to the student registration plan summary. There is no course or class restriction c hecking in student registration planning. ŁUse the View Sections button to access a list of class se ctions for a course returned by the search.(This button is displayed when the Allow adding course sections to plan indicator is checked on SOATERM.) ŁUse the Add button in the view section results to add the section to the plan summary. There is no course or class restriction checking in student registration planning. ŁUse the Catalog Search Results button in the view sectio n results to return to the search results. ŁUse the Save Plan button in the Summary section to save studen t registration plan changes. Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. The Summary used with the Plan Ahead path displays the total planned hours and any combined previously registered and CEU hours . Only planned sections or courses can be added or removed from the registration plan summary in the Plan Ahead path. Registered classes displayed in the registration plan summary are informational only and cannot be modified. Changes to registered classes must occur in the registration plan summary in the Register for Classes path. Please refer to the fiFind Classesfl topic earlier in this section for information on using basic and advanced searches and for field definitions. Please refer to the fiView Sectionsfl topic under the fiBrowse Course Catalogfl topic for field definitions and information on sections returned by a search. Plan Ahead - Faculty member and advisor accessFaculty members and advisors can be given access to planning to create registration plans for students. After choosing the Plan Ahead path, logging in, and selecting a term, the faculty member or advisor must then ente r a student ID (password). If security is passed based on the PLANAHEAD process rules on SOAFACS, the faculty member or advisor can access the Select a Plan page and create student registration plans up to the maximum allowed per user ID as defined on SOATERM. /n 183 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration All plans created for students or by student s are displayed in the Select a Plan page, along with any Degree Works SEPs . When plans are displayed that were not created by the login ID user, the name of the plan crea tor and the associated persona are displayed. Faculty members and advisors cannot mark any plan created by a student as preferred. They can approve any plans created by the student or plans created for the student by that login user ID. Faculty members or advisors can edit or delete plans they had previously created for students. No plans can be deleted or edited that were not created by the login ID user. Plan Ahead - Created by OthersThe Created by Others tab is displayed in the Plan Ahead path, when plans exist that were created by users other than the login ID user. Students, faculty members, and advisors can access this tab. Multiple plan s are displayed by name and can be expanded to view the courses in each plan. When you choose to edit a plan or create a new plan, you can view the plans created by other individuals or personas. Plans that ar e displayed here can be used to add courses and/or classes to a student™s personal plan in the registration plan summary. These plans cannot be edited by anyone other than the plan creator. Fields Descriptions Number of Plans not created by me Number of plans created by others that can be viewed and used to update a student™s registration plan. TermTerm code and description of the selected term that is open for registration planning. Plan TitleTitle of registration pl an created by another individual. Created By and PersonaUser who created the plan. The persona is displayed when plans have been created by another login ID user. A link to the faculty card is available from the user name when the person is a faculty member. Add AllButton used to add courses and/or sections from a plan created by a user other than the student to the registration plan summary. TitleCourse title. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. DetailsCourse subject, course number, and section number. HoursCourse hours. /n 184 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. The Schedule View in this path displays planned classes in the student registration plan with assigned days and times. Courses in the st udent registration plan are not displayed in the schedule, as courses do not have assigned days and times. In addition, should registration exist in this term, those classe s are displayed in the Schedule View with a status of Registered . Plan Ahead - Degree Works plans Third party degree audit registration plans, such as those from Degree Works, can be used with Banner student registration plans. Degree Works uses Student Educational Plans (SEPs) that are created in the Student Planner. SEPs can be loaded to Banner for use in creating student registration plans. However, they are not editable. They are only used as a reference when creating Banner st udent registration plans. Also, processing student registration plans using Degree Wo rks plans does not send updates back to Degree Works. Use the Degree Works tab in the Plan Ahead path to access Degree Works (SEP) plans when the third party interface has been set up on SOAREST, third party degree audit system plans are active for the term on SOAT ERM, and third party plans exist in Degree Works for use with student registration planning. Schedule TypeCourse schedule type. InstructorCourse instru ctor or instructors. Grade ModeCourse grade mode. NoteButton used to access a note added about the plan item or the overall plan. A check mark indicates data exists for the note. View SectionsButton used to display the sections associated with the course. When sections are di splayed, you can use the Add button to add a section to the student registration plan. Add CourseButton used to add the course to the student registration plan. Fields Descriptions Number of Degree Works Plans for this term Number of Degree Works ( SEP) plans available for the term.Term Term code and description of the selected term that is open for registration planning. Plan Title Title of Degree Works registration plan. Fields Descriptions /n 185 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. The Schedule View in this path displays planned classes in the student registration plan with assigned days and times. Courses in the st udent registration plan are not displayed in the schedule, as courses do not have assigned days and times. In addition, should registration exist in this term, those classe s are displayed in the Schedule View with a status of Registered . Created ByUser who created the plan. Critical IndicatorCheck box used to indicate whether the course was flagged as critical for the student™s curriculum requirements in Degree Works. TitleCourse title from Degree Works. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. DetailsCourse subject, course number, and section number from Degree Works. HoursCourse hours from Degree Works. DeliveryDelivery method for the course, such as online or lecture, from Degree Works. Choice GroupGroup the course is associated with such as prerequisite, corequisite, linked course, and so on, from Degree Works. Choice DescriptionDescription of the choice group from Degree Works. Attribute SummaryAttribute associated with the course, such as Honors Program, from Degree Works. NoteButton used to access a note added about the plan item or the overall plan. A check mark indicates data exists for the note. View SectionsButton used to display the sections associated with the Degree Works course from the SEP. When sections are displayed, you can use the Add button to add a section to the student registration plan. Add CourseButton used to add the course to the student registration plan. Fields Descriptions /n 186 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Plan Ahead - Name Your Plan When you save your plan, the Name Your Plan window is displayed so you can enter and save your plan with a descriptive name. If you do not enter a name and select Save, the system assigns a generic name, such as Class Schedule for Registration Fall 203610 .Plans - Register for Classes path This view of the Plans tab is displayed when you select the Register for Classes path from the Registration Landing page, you have student registration plans and/or Degree Works plans for the selected term, and the te rm is open for registration planning. In order for student registra tion plans and Degree Works (SEP) plans to be displayed in the Register for Classes path, the third party interface needs to be configured on SOAREST, and the following SOATERM settings must be checked: ŁCheck third party degree audit system plan ŁDisplay Self-Service Plans in registration ŁDisplay third party degree audit system plans in registration Use the Plans tab to register for sections from student registration plans and/or Degree Works (SEP) plans. Plans are displayed in a list and can be collapsed or expanded to view plan detail. When plans are expanded, student registration plans have a different column configuration than Degree Works plans. Student registration plans created in the Plan Ahead path are term-based and can consist of courses and/or sections. Students can regist er directly from these plans. The planning term will always match the regist ration term. It is important to note that pl ans cannot be modified in the Register for Classes path. When a student selects a term in the Register for Classes path, he/she will always be presented with the Find Classes tab. If the st udent has existing registration plans that were created in the Plan Ahead path and the SOATERM settings have been defined, the student can navigate to the Plans tab and re gister for classes using his/her student registration plans and/or Degree Works plans. You can view the Schedule, Schedule Details, and Summary sections for registration from the Plans tab. ŁUse the Add button to add the section from a plan to the registration summary. You can never add courses to th e registration summary. Degree Works plans only consist of courses, so it is necessary to view available sections and then add the sections from the Degree Works plans to the registration plan summary. Student registration plans can cons ist of courses and/or sections, so you can either view sections associated with courses in a student registration plan, add sections Fields Descriptions Plan Name Registration plan name. /n 187 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration directly to the registration summary, or view additional sections for an existing section in the student registration plan and select a different CRN. ŁUse the View Sections button to view a list of class sections for a course in the plan. You can also view available sections from an existing section in the student registration plan to search for and select a different CRN. ŁUse the Add button to add the section to the registration plan summary. ŁUse the Return to Plan button to go back to the Plans tab and continue registering from the listed student registration plans and/or Degree Works plans. ŁUse the Search button from the View Sections window to navigate to the Class Search. ŁUse the Submit button in the registration summary to register for the classes that have been added to the summary. Please refer to the fiView Sectionsfl topic under the fiBrowse Course Catalogfl topic for field definitions and information on sections returned by a search. Here are the fields that are displayed for st udent plans in the Register for Classes path and the Plans tab. Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description of the term in which the plan is active. PlanStudent registration plan name entered by the user or Degree Works (SEP) plan name generated by the third party degree audit system interface. Created by and PersonaUser who created the plan. The persona is displayed when the plan was created by another login ID user. A link to the faculty card is available from the user name when the person is a faculty member. My Preferred Plan Text displayed for the student™s preferred plan. Name and Persona of Approved Plan Name and persona displayed when a plan has been approved by a faculty member or advisor. Title Course title. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Details Course subject, course number, and section number. Hours Course hours. /n 188 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Here are the fields that are displayed for Degree Works plans in the Register for Classes path and the Plans tab. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule TypeCourse schedule type. InstructorCourse instru ctor or instructors. Grade ModeCourse grade mode. NoteButton used to access a note added about the plan item or the overall plan. A check mark indicates data exists for the note. All notes in the Register for Classes path are display only. View SectionsButton displayed when registering from a plan and the class section needs to be se lected for a course or the section needs to be changed. AddButton displayed when registering from a plan and the class section needs to be added to the plan. Fields Descriptions Number of Degree Works Plans for this term Number of Degree Works ( SEP) plans available for the term.Term Term code and description of the selected term that is open for registration planning. Plan Title Title of Degree Works registration plan. Created By User who created the plan. Critical Indicator Check box used to indicate whether the course was flagged as critical for the student™s curriculum requirements in Degree Works. Title Course title from Degree Works. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Details Course subject, course number, and section number from Degree Works. Hours Course hours from Degree Works. Fields Descriptions /n 189 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Register for Classes - Tuition and Fees When you submit a classes or a registration plan for registration and fee assessment is in use, the Tuition and Fees link is displayed in the Summary section of the page. When you click on the link, the Tuition and Fees window is displayed. The data in this window is display only and contains a link to your account information in Banner Student Self- Service 8.x. BlocksUse this section of the page to view and select blocks of courses for scheduling and registration. Use the Blocks tab to access this section of the page. You can select a block DeliveryDelivery method for the course, such as online or lecture, from Degree Works. Choice GroupGroup the course is associated with such as prerequisite, corequisite, linked course, and so on, from Degree Works. Choice DescriptionDescription of the choice group from Degree Works. Attribute SummaryAttribute associated with the course, such as Honors Program, from Degree Works. NoteButton used to access a note added about the plan item or the overall plan. A check mark indicates data exists for the note. View SectionsButton used to display the sections associated with the Degree Works course from the SEP. When sections are displayed, you can use the Add button to add a section to the student registration plan. Add CourseButton used to add the course to the student registration plan. Fields Descriptions Code Detail code for the student™s fee. Description Detail code description for the student™s fee. Amount Detail code charge amount for the student™s fee. Total Hours Total charges on the student™s account for this term. This amount does not represent all that may be owed on the student™s account. Total Credit Hours Total hours for registration. Fields Descriptions /n 190 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration using the associated radio button. Once a blo ck has been selected, the information for the summary and calendar is display only. The Action field in the Summary section cannot be changed. Depending on how your block rules are defined, you can add or drop classes within a block. You can also add or drop an entire block. When a block is dropped, all courses within the block are dropped. The drop proces s follows existing Web Registration rules including AUTODROP, based on the settings for the term on SOATERM. (These settings were formerly housed on GTVSDAX.) Changes are reflected in the SFRBSEL, SFRSTCR, and SFRSTCA tables. In order to drop a block, only one course re gistration status for drop or withdraw can be available on all classes in the block. The de fault drop or withdraw course registration status code is entered on GTVSDAX under the internal code WEBRSTSDRP and internal group WEBREG . The drop or withdraw course registration status must be valid for each part of term on all classes within the block, or valid for open learning classes within the block. In the List View of the student™s schedule, a course that is associated with a block displays the block detail. For example, for the course NURS 3100 Section 1, the detail could be, Block member of: Third Year Nursing Second Semester Track 1 .Fields Descriptions Select Your Block OptionRadio group th at displays options appropriate for the student such as enrolling in a new block, changing enrollment in a block, or removing an enrolled block from the student™s schedule. The available options are displayed above each block and include the specific block name. Values are: ŁSuggested Block: Block Name - This option is displayed when the block has been pre-assigned to the student. ŁAlternate Block: Block Name - This option is displayed when the student has met a rule to which the block has been attached. ŁDrop all classes that are part of your current block: Block Name - This option is displayed when the student is registered in the block and is allowed to drop the block. TermTerm code and description for the registration block selection. BlockRegistration block name and description. TitleCourse title for the course in the registration block. A Calendar button is displayed for an open learning course, so the student can enter the start or end date. SubjectSubject for the course in the registration block. /n 191 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. Projections Use this section of the page to review th e projected courses for the student and term based on CAPP program requirements or third party progra m requirements. Courses are designated as mandatory or elective. The st udent can search on and view sections and add them to the registration summary. Use the Projections tab to access this information. The display of courses is based on the restri ction and projected registration settings on SOATERM. You can choose to only display pr ojected courses. No courses are displayed when projected courses are not available for the term. In this case the following message is displayed: There are no projected courses for this term. Contact an administrator . You can also include failed courses in the projec tion and/or mark failed courses as most probable for the projection. The SVQ_PROJECTIONRESULTS view is used to collect projected course details by joining the Course Search Result View ( SVQ_COURSESEARCH ) and the SFRREGP Subject DescriptionCourse subject description. CourseCourse number for the course in the registration block. SectionSection number for the course in the registration block. HoursCredit hours for the course in the registration block. CRNCourse reference number for the course in the registration block. TermTerm for the course in the registration block. InstructorInstructor for the cour se in the registration block. Meeting TimesMeeting information, including meeting days, times, buildings, and rooms, for the course in the registration block. CampusCampus for the course in the registration block. StatusRegistration status for the co urse in the registration block. Conditional Add and DropCheck box used to indicate that all changes to the schedule are required for registration. This check box is displayed in the Summary section of Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Bloc ks, and Projections when the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator is checked for the term on SOATERM. Process BlockButton used to submit the block changes for registration. This button is active when changes have been made. Fields Descriptions /n 192 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration table. The output is used to display projected registration data in Self-Service for a student. Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. View Sections This section of the page displays section-related information for the course on the Projections tab. This data is accessed using the View sections button and is presented as a list of sections in the Find Classes tab. When a course has no associated sections, a corresponding message is displayed. When the section count for a course is more than ten, the Refine link is displayed at the top right of the page. Use this link to furthe r refine the list of sections from which to choose. Use the Add button to add the section to the registration summary. Use the Return to Projections button to return to projected course list in the Projections tab. Fields Descriptions Title Course title, subject title, or attribute title. Course title is displayed when the projected record has a course.Subject title is displayed when the projected record is not a course and only has a subject. Attribute title is displayed when the projected record is not a course, does not have a subject, and only has an attribute. Details Course subject and number range. Type Indicates whether the course is mandatory or elective. Attribute Course attribute description. View Sections Button used to view sections of the course. Conditional Add and DropCheck box used to indicate that all changes to the schedule are required for registration. This check box is displayed in the Summary section of Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Bloc ks, and Projections when the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator is checked for the term on SOATERM. Submit Button used to submit the schedule for registration. Fields Descriptions Return to ProjectionsButton used to go back to the projected course list. /n 193 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Structured Use the Structured tab to vi ew and select courses for registration based on CAPP program requirements or on third party program requirements. Use the breadcrumb trail at the top of the page to see which level of information is being displayed. As you navigate to each new level, that new level is added to the breadcrumb ProgramProgram of study for the sections. TermTerm code and description for the term in which the course is offered. RefineLink used to refine the list of sections presented. TitleTitle of the course. When you click on the specific Title link for the course, such as Introduction to Acco unting, you can view the term and CRN and access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description from the course catalog. Course NumberCourse number from the course catalog. SectionSection number from the course catalog. HoursCourse credit hours from the course catalog. CRNCourse reference number from the course catalog. TermTerm in which the course is offered. InstructorCourse instructor. Meeting TimesCourse meeting information which includes days of the week, times, building, room , start date, and end date. CampusCourse campus. StatusCourse status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain, time conflicts , restrictions, and so on. AddButton used to add the section to the registration summary. Conditional Add and DropCheck box used to indicate that all changes to the schedule are required for registration. This check box is displayed in the Summary section of Find Classes, Enter CRNs, Bloc ks, and Projections when the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator is checked for the term on SOATERM. SubmitButton used to submit the schedule for registration. Fields Descriptions /n 194 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration trail. A sample breadcrumb trail could be: Top > Elective > Elective Classes for Year 1 > Select from the attached 9 requirements .The initial display may contain a message to select from a specific number of requirements and conditions or list headings of Mandatory, Elective, and Optional with requirements at lower le vels of display. A check mark in a circle is used to show the completion status. The View button takes you down to the next level. When the next level displays course information, the View button is replaced with a View Sections button. When the View Sections button is selected for a course, you are taken to the associated course sections. A Refine link is displayed which allows you to reduce the list of sections using the basic search parameters, and then add courses to the registration summary. That breadcrumb trail could be: Top > Elective > Elective Classes for Year 1 > Select from the attached 9 requirements > Search Results .Use the Structured Overview button at the top right of the page to view a tiered hierarchy of requirements. (This button resembles a bulleted list with indented bullets and lines.) The tiered view shows all the requirements and conditions in one scrollable display, instead of drilling down through levels of data using the breadcrumb trail. When an open learning course is selected, the Confirm Your Dates window is displayed. Use this window to view the course informat ion with the permitted start and end dates. Enter the date when the course will be offi cially started, and the expected date of completion will be populated by the sys tem based on the duration. Use the Confirm button to save the changes or the Cancel button to close the window. Error severity for registration is defined on SOATERM for structured registration. You can set the severity to Fatal (registration changes are not saved until all structured registration requirements are met), Warning (registration changes are saved and the student is warned when structured registration requirements have not been met), or None (registration changes are saved, and the student is not informed when structured registration requirements have not been met). Fields Descriptions Breadcrumb trail Used to indicate which level of requirements are being viewed, for example, Top > Mandatory > Mandatory Year 1.This can be used to navigate back and forth through the levels of requirements. Structured OverviewButton used to di splay a tiered list of requirements, ranges, and conditions in a separate window. Program Program code and description. Term Term code and description. Instructions Information about total of combined conditions and courses that must be select ed or maximum credits that can be selected. Select from... Select from a list of requirements. /n 195 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiSchedule Informat ionfl topic in the fiFind Classes fl section for information on the Schedule view, Schedule Details view, and Summary of the schedule in the lower portion of the page. Search Results You can search on sections of courses for the program requirements. You can refine the search and continue to review the results. Use the entries on SOAWSCR to create the list of fields a student can use to search. The fiel ds must fit on one page, and course number range fields should be included. The search cannot be expanded to be an advanced search.Refer to the "Find Classes" topic under "Class Search and Registration" for more information on search criteria. ViewButton used to go down a level and view the course list of requirements. Course ListList of courses the student can select from and drill down into and view requirement details. Courses can be specific or from a range. The check mark in the circle indicates the completion status of the requirement. View SectionsButton used to view sectio ns for a course in the list at that level of information. Fields Descriptions Breadcrumb Trail Levels of information that have been displayed. Program Name Name of program in use. Course name Name of course used in search. Search Results Number of cla sses returned in the search.Term Term code and description for the term in which the course is offered. Title, Schedule TypeCourse title. Schedule type is listed below the course title if it is configured for display. Subject, DescriptionSubjec t code and description. Course NumberCourse number. CRNCourse reference number. Instructor Course instructor or instructors. Fields Descriptions /n 196 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Structured Overview window This window is accessed using the Structured Overview button from any level of requirements data. This view displays a hier archy of requirements that can be reviewed without drilling down through the levels of data using the bre adcrumb trail. This view provides a visual display of requirements that have been met (green check mark), and /or still need to be met (gray check mark), based on mandatory, optional , or elective areas. Schedule and Options Use this section of the page to view a detailed summary of the class schedule for registration. You can update the hours, level, study path, and grade mode if you choose. Be aware that you cannot change course options on this section of the page when using a date range to search on and register for courses. Use the Submit button to save the changes and update the schedule. Use the Schedule and Options tab to access this information. Note: The functionality for changing a sele cted study path is not available on the main Registration page in Banner 9.x. Students can use the Schedule and Options page to associ ate a study path with a specific class.Meeting TimesCourse meeting inform ation, including meeting days, times, buildings, and rooms. Hours Course credit hours. SectionSection number. Status Course status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain. Campus Course campus. Term Course term and description. Status Course status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain. AddButton used to add the course to the summary, in preparation for registration. RefineLink used to open the search criteria to find more specific results. Submit Button used to submit the classes in the registration summary for registration. Fields Descriptions /n 197 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Fields Descriptions Term Term for which student has registered for courses. Email or Download Button used to email the schedule and download the schedule to a calendar. This button resembles a calendar within an envelope. Print Button used to print the schedule. This button resembles a printer. Title Title of the course. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a Course Details window with a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Subject Course subject. Course Course number. SectionSection number. Hours Course registration hours. This field can be changed. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule Type Course schedule type. Grade Mode Course grade mode. This field can be changed. Use the link to display valid values. Level Course level. This field can be changed. Use the link to display valid values. Study Path Study path associated wit h the course. This field can be changed when study paths are in use. Use the link to display valid values. Date Date on which the student registered for the course. Status Course registration status. Message Course registration message. Total Hours RegisteredTotal hours for which the student is registered for the term.Total Hours Billing Total hours for wh ich the student will be billed for the term.Submit Button used to submit the schedule for registration. /n 198 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Email and Download ScheduleUse the Email/Calendar button to display a window where you can enter email addresses to which you wish to send a schedule and a .ics internet calendar file. The email subject line contains the student™s name and term, but it can be changed. You can send email to yourself and/or other parties. The .ics file is attached to the email and can be loaded to your calendar. The email address that is marked as preferred and Web-enabled on the General Person Identification Page (SPAIDEN) will automatic ally be populated an d checked when the button is selected. The button resembles a calendar in an envelope and is on the Schedule and Options, Look Up a Schedule, and Schedule by Centric Period tabs. Print ScheduleUse the Print button to view and print a schedule. You can view the schedule in print preview mode and then continue to your local printer to print the schedule document. This button resembles a printer and is on the Schedule and Options and Look Up a Schedule tabs. Registration InformationUse this page to view registration history for a student, after a term has been closed for registration. You can also view prior schedules and ungraded classes, as well as schedules that use student centric periods. To access this page, select the View Registration Information link from the Registration Landing page. Look up a ScheduleUse the Look up a Schedule tab to access student schedules. You can pick a schedule for a term and then use the Schedule View and Sc hedule Detail View tabs to see more detail. When a student has past schedules in multip le terms, the schedules can be viewed by term.Fields Descriptions Myself (emailaddress @location.edu) Check box used to send the email schedule and schedule calendar file to the student. EmailMultiple fields, used to s end the student™s email schedule and schedule calendar file to other parties. SubjectEmail subject line. This defaults to the student™s name and term. It can be changed. SendButton used to send student™s email schedule to email and schedule calendar file. /n 199 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration When you select a term in order to look up a schedule under View Registration Information, and no active r egistration records exist for th e student, the term may still be displayed as available for selection. This occurs when SFBETRM records still exist for courses that were dropped and/or deleted from the Student Course Registration Page (SFAREGS) or dropped in Self-Service. Fields Descriptions Term Term for which schedules exist for past registration records. When a student has registration records in multiple terms, you can select each term for review. When no active registration record exists for a student, the term may still display in th e list as available. This can occur when SFBETRM records exist. Email or Download Button used to email the schedule and download the schedule to a calendar. This button resembles a calendar within an envelope. Print Button used to print the schedule. This button resembles a printer. Title Title of the course. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description. Course NumberCourse number. SectionSection number. Hours Course credit hours. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule Type Schedule type. Grade Mode Grade mode used for the course. Level Course level. Part of Term Part of term course was taken in. Study Path Study path with whic h the course is associated. DateDate the course was added to the schedule. /n 200 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiEmail and Download Schedulefl an d fiPrint Schedulefl topics in the fiSchedule and Optionsfl section for more information on these scheduling options. Active RegistrationsUse the Active Registrations tab to access acti ve registration record s. This pertains to classes that are not considered to be complete for transcript use. Schedule by Centric Period Use the Schedule by Centric Period tab to view student schedules by student centric period. Schedule information is displayed by term for the student centric period. StatusCourse registration status. MessageCourse registration message. Total Hours RegisteredTotal credit hours the student registered for. Total Hours BillingTotal b illing hours for the student. Fields Descriptions Course InformationCourse title, course number, and section number. Associated TermTerm for which a schedu le exists for past registration. When a student has registration records in multiple terms, you can select each term for review. CRNCourse reference number. StatusCourse registration status. Status DateCourse registration status date. Schedule TypeSchedule type for the course. Credit HoursCredit hours for the course. Instructional Method Instructional method for the course. CampusCampus for the course. Start DateCourse start date. End DateCourse end date. LevelCourse level. InstructorInstructor as signed to the course. Grade ModeGrade mode used for the course. Fields Descriptions /n 201 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Refer to the fiEmail and Download Schedulefl topic in the fiSchedule and Optionsfl section for more information on these scheduling options. Fields Descriptions Class Schedule ForStudent centric period code. When multiple student centric periods are available for the student, you can select a code from the list to view different schedules. Email or Download Button used to email the schedule and download the schedule to a calendar. This button resembles a calendar within an envelope. TitleTitle of the course. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Accounting, you can access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. DetailsCourse subject, course number, and section number. HoursCredit hours for the course. CRNCourse reference number. Schedule TypeSchedule type for the course. Grade ModeGrade mode used for the course. LevelCourse level. Part of termPart of term for the course. Study PathStudy path with whic h the course is associated. DateDate on which registra tion for the course occurred. StatusCourse registration status. MessageRegistration message. Total Hours RegisteredTotal registration hours for the courses in the student centric period. Total Hours BillingTotal billing hours fo r the courses in the student centric period. Total Hours CEUTotal continuing education units for the courses in the student centric period. /n 202 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Browse ClassesThis page allows you to perform basic and advanced searches for classes you may want to take or about which you want more informati on. To access this page, select the Browse Classes link from the Registration Landing page . This link takes you to the Select a Term page. Once you select a term or enter a date range, you can continue to the Class Search page. Note: This page is used for searching only. No action can be taken on courses from this path. You can perform basic or advanced searches. The results are displayed in the Browse Classes Search Results. Use the Search Again button to perform a new search. Basic Search Criteria Use any of the following criteria to perform a search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for fia llfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to re-enter the search criteria. Fields are delivered to display for a basic se arch or an advanced search. Fields can be rearranged between the two search areas by modifying the elements on the SOAWSCR page. Advanced Search CriteriaSelect the Advanced link to access this section. You can use the following criteria to perform an advanced search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for Fields Descriptions Term Term selected for the search.Keyword (With All Words)Enter all the words you want to find. The search uses AND logic. Sections returned contain all of the words entered. For example, if you enter History American , only classes with both History and American in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Latin American History, History of the American West, or American Cultures with a subj ect description of History. SubjectCourse subject. Select one or more values from the list. Subject and Course Number Course subject and course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. InstructorCourse instructor. Se lect a value from the list. /n 203 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration fiallfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to search again. Fields Descriptions Term Term selected for the search.Keyword (With All Words)Enter all the words you want to find. The search uses AND logic. Sections returned contain all of the words entered. For example, if you enter History American , only classes with both History and American in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Latin American History, History of the American West, or American Cultures with a subj ect description of History. SubjectCourse subject and description. Select one or more values from the list. Subject and Course Number Course subject and course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. InstructorCourse instructor and description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword (With Any Word)Enter any of the words you want to find. The search uses OR logic. Sections returned contain at least one of the words entered. For example, if you enter History , any classes with History in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. If you enter History Math , any classes with History or Math in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. KeywordEnter partial words you want to find, using wildcards on the front and back of the string, such as %string% . The search uses an AND operator. The search returns courses that match the pa rtial keywords entered. For example, if you were searching for MATH 203, the following strings would find a match: †Ath 03 †Mat 20 †At 0 The following strings would not find a match: †Math 444 †Ath 4 †English 203 /n 204 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Keyword (Exact Phrase)Enter the exact phrase you want to find. Sections returned contain the exact phrase entered. For example, if you enter Introduction to , any classes with that phrase are returned, such as Introduction to Accounti ng, Introduction to Math. Keyword (Without the Word) Enter the word you do not want to find. This option must be used with another Keyword se arch field, such as All, Any, Partial, or Phrase. Sections returned contain the words entered in the Keyword (With Any Word) and Keyword (With All Words) fields but do not contain the word entered here. For example, if you enter History as any keyword and American as the word to exclude, the search returns sections with History in any of the fields searched by keywords, but none of the sections returned includes American .AttributeCourse attribute and description. Select one or more values from the list. CampusCourse campus and description. Select one or more values from the list. LevelCourse level and description. Select one or more values from the list. BuildingsBuilding in wh ich course meets with description. Select one or more values from the list. CollegeCourse college and descr iption. Select one or more values from the list. DepartmentsCourse department and description. Select one or more values from the list. Instructional MethodsCourse instructional method and description. Select one or more values from the list. Schedule TypeCourse schedule type and description. Select from the list.DurationCourse duration, for open learning courses only. Enter a numerical value and choose a duration unit from the list, for example a numerical value of 4 and unit value of weeks.Part of TermCourse part of term and description. Select one or more values from the list. TitleCourse title. Enter the complete course title for the search.Fields Descriptions /n 205 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Browse Classes Search Results Here are fields for the courses found by the search, displayed in the Browse Classes Search Results with the number of records found. SessionsCourse session and description. Select one or more values from the list. Course NumberCourse number. Course Number RangeCourse number range with from and to numbers Credit Hour RangeCourse credit hour range with from and to hours Meeting Days: MondayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Monday. Meeting Days: TuesdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Tuesday. Meeting Days: WednesdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Wednesday. Meeting Days: ThursdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Thursday. Meeting Days: FridayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Friday. Meeting Days: SaturdayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Saturday. Meeting Days: SundayCheck box used to only show courses that meet on Sunday. Start Time (On or after)Course start time with hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Select values from the lists. End Time (On or after)Course end time with hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Select values from the lists. Open Sections OnlyCheck box used to indicate that only sections with available seats should be returned by the search. This works with the settings on SOATERM. Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description for the term in which the course is offered. Keyword Type of keyword search used and data entered for the search, such as Keyword (With All Words): Accounting .Fields Descriptions /n 206 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Browse CoursesThis page allows you to perform basic and advanced searches for course catalog information. To access this page, select the Browse Course Ca talog link from the Registration Landing page. This link takes you to the Select a Term page. Once you select a term, you can continue to the Browse Courses page. Note: This page is used for searching only. No action can be taken on courses from this path. You can perform basic or advanced searches. The results are displayed in the Browse Courses Search Results. Use the Search Again button to perform a new search. The SVQ_COURSESEARCH view facilitates searches on the Course Catalog. Search AgainButton used to retu rn to the Class Search (Browse Classes) page and enter new search criteria. TitleTitle of the course. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Acco unting, you can view the term and CRN and access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. All links are displayed whether or not detail data exists. You can use SOAWSCR to turn off the display for specific links or to change the display order. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description. Course NumberCourse number. SectionSection number. HoursCourse credit hours. CRNCourse reference number. TermTerm in which the course is offered. InstructorCourse instructor. Meeting TimesCourse meeting information which includes days of the week, times, building, room , start date, and end date. CampusCourse campus. StatusCourse status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain, time conflicts , restrictions, and so on. Fields Descriptions /n 207 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Basic Search Criteria Use any of the following criteria to perform a search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for fia llfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to re-enter the search criteria. Fields are delivered to display for a basic se arch or an advanced search. Fields can be rearranged between the two search areas by modifying the elements on the SOAWSCR page. Advanced Search CriteriaSelect the Advanced link to access this section. You can use the following criteria to perform an advanced search. No fields are required. Fields left blank indicate a search for fiallfl. Fields with the tool tip You can add another allow multiple values to be selected for the search. Use the Search button to continue or the Clear link to search again. Fields Descriptions Term Term selected for the search.Subject Course subject. Select one or more values from the list. Course Number Course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword Enter partial words you want to find, using wildcards on the front and back of the string, such as %string% . The search uses an AND operator. The search returns courses that match the pa rtial keywords entered. For example, if you were searching for MATH 203, the following strings would find a match: †Ath 03 †Mat 20 †At 0 The following strings would not find a match: †Math 444 †Ath 4 †English 203 FieldsDescriptions Term Term selected for the search.Subject Course subject. Select one or more values from the list. /n 208 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Course Number Course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword Enter partial words you want to find, using wildcards on the front and back of the string, such as %string% . The search uses an AND operator. The search returns courses that match the pa rtial keywords entered. For example, if you were searching for MATH 203, the following strings would find a match: †Ath 03 †Mat 20 †At 0 The following strings would not find a match: †Math 444 †Ath 4 †English 203 Subject and Course Number Course subject and course number with course description. Select one or more values from the list. Keyword (With All Words)Enter all the words you want to find. The search uses AND logic. Sections returned contain all of the words entered. For example, if you enter History American , only classes with both History and American in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned, such as Latin American History, History of the American West, or American Cultures with a subj ect description of History. Keyword (With Any Word)Enter any of the words you want to find. The search uses OR logic. Sections returned contain at least one of the words entered. For example, if you enter History , any classes with History in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. If you enter History Math , any classes with History or Math in any of the fields searched by keywords are returned. Keyword (Exact Phrase)Enter the exact phrase you want to find. Sections returned contain the exact phrase entered. For example, if you enter Introduction to , any classes with that phrase are returned, such as Introduction to Accounti ng, Introduction to Math. Fields Descriptions /n 209 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Browse Courses Search Results Here are the fields for the courses found by the search, displayed in the Browse Courses Search Results with the number of records found. Keyword (Without the Word) Enter the word you do not want to find. This option must be used with another Keyword se arch field, such as All, Any, Partial, or Phrase. Sections returned contain the words entered in the Keyword (With Any Word) and Keyword (With All Words) fields but do not contain the word entered here. For example, if you enter History as any keyword and American as the word to exclude, the search returns sections with History in any of the fields searched by keywords, but none of the sections returned includes American .InstructorCourse instructor and description. Select one or more values from the list. TitleCourse title. Enter the complete course title for the search.AttributeCourse attribute and description. Select one or more values from the list. LevelCourse level and description. Select one or more values from the list. CollegeCourse college and descr iption. Select one or more values from the list. DivisionCourse division and description. Select one or more values from the list. DepartmentsCourse department and description. Select one or more values from the list. Schedule TypeCourse schedule type and description. Select from the list.Course Number RangeCourse number range with from and to numbers Credit Hour RangeCourse credit hour range with from and to hours Fields Descriptions Term Term code and description for the term in which the course is offered. Fields Descriptions /n 210 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration View Sections This section of the page displays the section-related information for a course. Select a course on the Browse Courses Search Results page, and use the View sections button to access this data. When a course has no associated sections, you are prompted to search again. Use the Catalog Search Results button to return to the results display and then the Search Again button to perform a new search. KeywordType of keyword search used and data entered for the search, such as Keyword (With All Words): Accounting .Search AgainButton used to return to the Course Search (Browse Course Catalog) page and enter new search criteria. Title, Schedule TypeTitle of the course with the schedule type. When you click on the specific course title name link, such as Introduction to Acco unting, you can view the term and CRN and access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. The schedule type is displayed with the course title if it is configured for display. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description from the course catalog. Course NumberCourse number from the course catalog. HoursCourse credit hours from the course catalog. DescriptionCourse description from the course catalog. View sectionsButton used to view t he sections for the course selected. Fields Descriptions Catalog Search ResultsButton used to return to the Browse Courses Search Results page. TermTerm code and description for the term in which the course is offered. Subject and Course Number Subject and course number associated with the sections displayed. TitleTitle of the course. When you click on the specific Title link for the course, such as Introduction to Acco unting, you can view the term and CRN and access a subset of links and view detailed information for each link. Fields Descriptions /n 211 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Set up Registration Self-Service pages This section contains administrative setup re quirements for the Registration Self-Service pages. Please refer to the Banner Student 8.x User Guide and the Banner Student 8.x Self- Service User Guide for setup information on existing functiona lity such as study paths and student centric periods. Subject DescriptionCourse subject description from the course catalog. Course NumberCourse number from the course catalog. SectionSection number from the course catalog. HoursCourse credit hours from the course catalog. CRNCourse reference number from the course catalog. TermTerm in which the course is offered. InstructorCourse instructor. Meeting TimesCourse meeting information which includes days of the week, times, building, room , start date, and end date. CampusCourse campus. StatusCourse status as to ho w many seats are filled and how many remain, time conflicts , restrictions, and so on. Page or sectionItem Description Select a TermTerm Control Page (SOATERM) Select the Activate on the Web (Master Web Control) check box to include the term in the Search a Term list.For registration to be allowed, select the Permit check box in the Registration section of the Term Information.Also complete the Web Registration Dates section in the Access Management information. If the Web registration dates are not current, the term will not be displayed in the Search a Term list.Fields Descriptions /n 212 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Term Control Page (SOATERM) Select the Study Path Required check box to require study paths for registration. Clear the Study Path Required check box to have study paths be optional. Select the Change Study Path check box to allow users to change the study path. Clear the Change Study Path check box to display the study path selected at registration, but not allow the user to change the study path. Curriculum Rules Control Page (SOACTRL) Select the Enable Study Paths check box to display and enable the Study Path field.Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the SCHBYDATE rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Terms Open for Registration field for searches by term and/or the Start Date and End Date fields for searches by date range. If this rule is not set to Y, the values in the pulldown for the term are not displayed. If this rule is not found, the value is assumed to be N, and the values in the pulldown for the term are not displayed. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the WEBTRMDTE rule for group STUWEB to Y to display date ranges for terms on all Banner Student Self-Service pages where the term is selected. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the WEBALTPINA rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Alternate PIN field. Select a Term - Name and ID SearchCrosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the ALLFAC rule for group FACWEB to Y to display all student names in a search. This rule only controls Self-Ser vice display. Use the process rule on SOAFACS for security processing. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the ALLADVR rule for group FACWEB to Y to display all advisee names in a search. This rule only controls Self-Ser vice display. Use the process rule on SOAFACS for security processing. Page or sectionItem Description /n 213 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the REGADVISEE rule for group FACWEB to Y or N to control which advisee names are displayed in a search. ŁWhen set to Y, only advisees assigned to the advisor and registered for classes for the selected term are displayed. ŁWhen set to N, all advisees assigned to the advisor for the selected term are displayed, whether they are registered or not. Find ClassesSchedule Page (SSASECT) Select the Voice Response and Self-Service Availability check box for each class you want to be available in Self-Service. Find Classes Results (and perform registration) Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPENROLL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the enrollment information in the Status field. Time status information and restrictions are also displayed. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPWL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the waitlist information in the Status field. Time status information and restrictions are also displayed. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the MAXREGNO rule for group WEBREG to the maximum number of registration attempts allowed for a student. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the CRNDIRECT rule for group WEBREG to Y to allow the student to add a class directly by entering the CRN. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the WEBRSTSDRP rule for group WEBREG to the Web drop course registration status code defined on STVRSTS to allow a student to drop a class. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the WEBRSTSREG rule for group WEBREG to the Web registered course status registration code defined on STVRSTS to allow a student to perform registration in Self-Service. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the REGACCTIME rule for group REGISTRATION to the number of minutes before timeout so a user can log into Self-Service for registration when the SFAREGS page is being used. Term Control Page (SOATERM) Select the Basic indicator for the registration model. Page or sectionItem Description /n 214 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator to Y to allow a student to perform conditional adds and drops for courses. Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Allow Student to Drop their Last Class indicator to Y to allow students to drop their last class during registration. Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Administration Drop Connected Course Error s radio group to indicate how administrative drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. Drop - The class is automatically dropped. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Do Not Drop, Report in Administrative Error Table - An error is reported, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Do Not Report and Do Not Drop - No error is reported, and no automatic action is taken by the system.Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Auto Drop Connected Course Drop Errors radio group to indicate how automatic drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. Drop Connected Course - Both classes in the pair are automatically dropped. Do Not Drop, Display Error - The student receives an error, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Confirm to Drop - The student receives a message asking if the other class in the pair can be automatically dropped. Allow Connected Drops - The student can drop any class, even if it is a linked course, a corequisite, or a prerequisite. No cross checking is performed for the missing connected class. Page or sectionItem Description /n 215 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Plans Term Control Page (SOATERM) Check the Term open for Self-Service planning indicator to open the te rm in the Key block for registration planning. Enter the maximum number of plans allowed for the plan in the Maximum plans for term field. Check the Allow adding course sections to plan indicator to allow students to add sections to the plan. When unchecked, only courses can be added to the plan. Check the Check third party degree audit system plan indicator to allow use of third party registration plans in Self-Service. Check the Display Self-Service Plans in registration indicator to display student plans and let students add sections to the registration summary. Check the Display Third Party Plans in registration indicator to display third party degree audit system plans (such as Degree Works) and let students add sections to the registration summary. BlocksTerm Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Allow Student to Select Conditional Add Drop indicator to Y to allow a student to perform conditional adds and drops for courses. Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Allow Student to Drop their Last Class indicator to Y to allow students to drop their last class during registration. Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Administration Drop Connected Course Error s radio group to indicate how administrative drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. Drop - The class is automatically dropped. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Do Not Drop, Report in Administrative Error Table - An error is reported, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Errors are reported in the SFTRGAM table. Do Not Report and Do Not Drop - No error is reported, and no automatic action is taken by the system.Page or sectionItem Description /n 216 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Term Control Page (SOATERM) - Registration SummarySet the Auto Drop, Connected Course, Drop Errors radio group to indicate how automatic drops should be processed during registration in Self-Service. Drop Connected Course - Both classes in the pair are automatically dropped. Do Not Drop, Display Error - The student receives an error, but there is no automatic action taken by the system. Confirm to Drop - The student receives a message asking if the other class in the pair can be automatically dropped. Allow Connected Drops - The student can drop any class, even if it is a linked course, a corequisite, or a prerequisite. No cross checking is performed for the missing connected class. ProjectionsTerm Control Page (SOATERM) Select the Projected indicator for the registration model. Define information on th e Projected Registration tab. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Define external code for the AREASELECT rule for group REGPROJSTRUCT .Define the external code for the CLASS rule for group REGPROJSTRUCT .Define the external code for the PRIADJFAC rule for group REGPROJSTRUCT .StructuredTerm Control Page (SOATERM) Select the Structured indicator for the registration model. Define information on the Structured Registration tab. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Define external code for the AREASELECT rule for group REGPROJSTRUCT .Define the external code for the CLASS rule for group REGPROJSTRUCT .Schedule and OptionsCrosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) - Schedule and OptionsSet the DISPENROLL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the enrollment information in the Status field. Time status information and restrictions are also displayed. Page or sectionItem Description /n 217 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) - Schedule and OptionsSet the DISPWL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the waitlist information in the Status field. Time status information and restrictions are also displayed. Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) - Course Details windowSet the DISPENROLL rule and the DISPWL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Enrollment/ Waitlist information in t he Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) - Course Details windowSet the DISPXL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Cross Listed Courses information in the Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) Set the SCHEDULEBOOKSTORELINKS rule to display the Bookstore Link information in the Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Registration InformationCrosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the PROCESSSCP rule to Y to display the Schedule by Centric Periods tab. Registration StatusTerm Control Page (SOATERM) To enable study paths, check the Enable Study Paths checkbox on SOACTRL. To require study paths, check the Study Path Required checkbox on SOATERM. To allow changes to st udy paths, check the Change Study Path checkbox on SOATERM. Browse ClassesCrosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPENROLL rule and the DISPWL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Enrollment/ Waitlist information in t he Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPXL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Cross Listed Courses information in the Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) Set the SCHEDULEBOOKSTORELINKS rule to display the Bookstore Link information in the Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Page or sectionItem Description /n 218 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Faculty CardContact cards for faculty members are availabl e in Self-Service Registration. They are accessed by clicking the link on the faculty member™s name. The ca rds display faculty contact information such as name, title, department, address, phone number, and email address, as well as a photo if one is provided and photos have been set up to be displayed. You can choose to not display the faculty ca rd. However, the card will still appear if the user clicks on the link, but it will not contain faculty information. A message is displayed indicating that the faculty information is not available. In order for information to be displayed on the card, the faculty member and/or advisor must have a record on the General Person Identification Page (SPAIDEN), as well as a record with an active status on the Faculty/Advisor Information Page (SIAINST). The faculty card is available in the following registration paths: ŁRegister for Classes ŁPlan Ahead ŁView Registration Information ŁBrowse Classes (sections) ŁBrowse Course Catalog Faculty Card data Information displayed on the faculty card comes from the following sources. Title The faculty card displays the title of the facu lty member. The title comes from the category on the Faculty/Advisor Inform ation Page (SIAINST), which in turn uses category code Browse CoursesCrosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPENROLL rule and the DISPWL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Enrollment/ Waitlist information in t he Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX)Set the DISPXL rule for group WEBREG to Y to display the Cross Listed Courses information in the Course Details window accessed from the Title field.Page or sectionItem Description /n 219 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration data from the Faculty Category Validation Pa ge (STVFCTG). Faculty category validation codes define the category into which a faculty member is placed, such as Advisor, Professor, Instructor, and so on. Department The faculty card displays the home department associated with the faculty member from the Faculty College and Depart ment information on SIAINST. If a home department is not identified, the faculty card uses the depart ment with the highest associated percentage. Address, phone, and emailThe rules that determine which faculty office address, office phone number, and email address will be displayed on th e faculty card are the same rules used to determine the office address, office phone number, and email address displayed in the Campus Directory. This ensures the consistency of contact information between the Campus Directory and the faculty card. The faculty card displays the address for the faculty member from the address information on the General Person Identification Page (SPAIDEN). The office address rules on the Directory Options Rules Page (GOADIRO) determine which address is displayed on the faculty contact card. Th e address type on GOADIRO with the lowest priority number that matches an address type on SPAIDEN determi nes the address that is displayed on the faculty card.The faculty card displays the phone number for the faculty member from the area code, phone number, and extension information on the General Person Telephone Page (SPATELE) or the Telephone tab on SPAIDEN. The office telephone rules on GOADIRO determine which phone number is displayed on the faculty card. The telephone type in GOADIRO with the lowest priori ty number that matches a telephone type on SPATELE determines the phone number that is displayed on the faculty card. The faculty card displays the em ail address for the faculty member from the email address information on the E-Mail Address Page (GO AEMAL) or the E-mail tab on SPAIDEN. The email address must be configured with the Preferred , Active , and Display on the Web indicators checked. Faculty Card configurationInformation displayed on the faculty card can be configured on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR). Whenever a fa culty member™s name is displayed as a link in registration or planning, this card can be displayed. Here are some exceptions: ŁIf the faculty card is not set up to be display ed, and the user clicks on the link, the card will appear, but it will not contain faculty inform ation. A message is displayed indicating that the faculty information is not available. ŁFor the REGISTRAR persona, when a faculty member is not active for the term, a message is displayed on the card in place of the faculty information. /n 220 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration ŁFor the REGISTRAR persona, when information for a faculty member is confidential or when the faculty member is deceased, a message is displayed on the card in place of the faculty information.ŁFor the ANONYMOUS , STUDENT , FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR personas, when information fo r a faculty member is confidential or when the faculty member is deceased, a generic message, No information is available at this time , is displayed. ŁFor the ANONYMOUS , STUDENT , FACULTY , ADVISOR , or FACULTY AND ADVISOR personas, when information for a faculty member is inactive, a generic message, No information is ava ilable at this time , is displayed. Default settings on SOAWSCR are used to co nfigure the faculty card for authenticated users and anonymous users. ŁAuthenticated users are those who access a page that requires a login, such as Register for Classes, Plan Ahead, or View Registration. The default SOAWSCR settings for authenticated users are configured to display all faculty contact information. SOAWSCR can be configured to not display specific contact data. ŁAnonymous users are those who access a page that does not require a login, such as Browse Courses or Browse Classes. The default SOAWSCR settings for anonymous users are configured to only the displa y the faculty name, department, and email address. This protects the faculty contact information from inadvertently being exposed to anyone with an internet connection. FieldsHere are the fields that ca n be displayed on the card. Faculty Card setupDo the following to ensure that contact info rmation is displayed on the faculty card. 1.Verify that the faculty member has a person record on the General Person Identification Page (SPAIDEN). Fields Descriptions NameName of faculty member. Title Title of faculty member. Department Department of faculty member. Address Office address of faculty member. Phone Number Office phone number of faculty member. Email Address Office ema il of faculty member. /n 221 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration 2.Verify that the faculty member is not desi gnated as confidential or deceased on the General Person Page (SPAPERS). 3.Verify that the faculty memb er has a record on the Faculty/Advisor Information Page (SIAINST) with an active status. 4.Verify that the faculty member has a home college and department defined on SIAINST. 5.Verify that the faculty member has a category defined on SIAINST. 6.Set up the email address information on the E-mail Address Page (GOAEMAL) and indicate that the email is the preferred addr ess, is active, and should be displayed on the Web. 7.Verify that office address and office phone directory item codes exist on the Directory Item Validation Page (GTVDIRO). 7.1. Verify that the directory item code of ADDR_OF exists on GTVDIRO. 7.2. Verify that the directory item code of TELE_OF exists on GTVDIRO. 8.Verify that the faculty member has an address record on SPAIDEN. 9.Verify that the faculty member ha s a telephone record on SPAIDEN. 10. Set up the office address display options using directory rules on the Directory Options Rules Page (GOADIRO). 10.1. Verify that the directory item code of ADDR_OF exists on GOADIRO. 10.2. Set up the office address type and priority using directory rules on GOADIRO under the directory item code of ADDR_OF .10.3. Set the address type on SPAIDEN equal to the address type for the ADDR_OF rule on GOADIRO. 11. Set up the office phone display options using directory rules on the Directory Options Rules Page (GOADIRO). 11.1. Verify that the directory item code of TELE_OF exists on GOADIRO. 11.2. Set up the office phone number type and priority using directory rules on GOADIRO under the dire ctory item code of TELE_OF .11.3. Set the telephone type on SPAIDEN equal to the telephone type for the TELE_OF rule on GOADIRO. 12. Set up the phone number format in the messages.properties file.Please refer to the Banner Student Registration Installation Guide 9.x for information on how to set up the phone number format. 13. Configure the display of the card information on the Overall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) for name, p hoto, title, department, address, phone number, and email address. This is fo r authenticated and/or anonymous users. 14. Configure the display of faculty photos. The image folder location must be specified in the banner_configuration file for the banner.picturesPath . A default image is delivered and should be placed in this folder for use when a faculty image is not available for display. /n 222 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Please refer to the Banner Student Registration Installation Guide 9.x for information on how to add and display photos. Registration Status tab setup Use the Overall Page and Field Configuratio n Page (SOAWSCR) to set up the display configuration rules for this tab. ŁPage Code 450 (Register Status) lists all status and class code entries and requires that the student status is displayed. ŁPage Codes 455 (Register Status Primar y Curriculum) and 460 (Register Status Secondary Curriculum) display the primary and secondary curriculum information. Status messages Registration status messages are displayed in the Registration Status tab. Here is some detail on messages and conditions for message display. Current studentWhen the student is not a current student fo r the term, the following message is displayed: You are not a student for the selected term. Please contact the registration office. Student status The student™s status is keyed of f of the general student status. ŁWhen the STVSTST_REG_IND is set to N, the following message is displayed: Your Student Status prevents registration. ŁWhen the STVSTST_REG_IND is set to Y, the following message is displayed: Your Student Status permits registration. Re-admittance The student re-admittance requirement is ba sed on the current general student record and the readmit term code in the SOBTERM table. The following message is displayed: Student requires being readmitted. /n 223 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration HoldsThe hold severity on the Term Control Page (SOATERM) must be set to Fatal for a hold status to prevent registration. When a registration hold exists for the current day, the following message is displayed: Holds exist. Academic status The academic standing, progress evaluati on, and combined academic standing are retrieved from the Term Course Maintenance Page (SHAINST). Those values are overridden by the values from the General Student Page (SGASTDN), when the override term on the current general student record equals the registration term. The current SGASTDN term must also equal the regist ration term. The follo wing message is displayed: Academic standing prevents registration .Here are the possible academic standing conditions and the resulting messages that can be presented to the student. Note: The study path is equal to the SOBCTRL_STUDY_PATH_IND value. Status Conditions Message Combined Academic Status is Null Academic Status code is Null Study Path is NAcademic Standing permits registration. Combined Academic Status is Null Academic Status code is Null Study Path is YYour overall Academic Standing permits registration. Combined Academic Status NullAcademic Status Not Null STVASTD_PREVENT_REG is YStudy Path is NYour Academic Standing is %01% which prevents registration. Combined Academic Status NullAcademic Status Not Null STVASTD_PREVENT_REG is YStudy Path is YYour overall Academic Standing is %01% which prevents registration. /n 224 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Study path The study path standing is displayed when the Academic Standing Status is configured on SOAWSCR to display and the following is true: ŁThe study path is enabled in the SOBCTRL table. Combined Academic Status is Null Academic Status Not Null STVASTD_PREVENT_REG is NStudy Path is N Your Academic Standing is %01% which permits registration. Combined Academic Status is Null Academic Status Not Null STVASTD_PREVENT_REG is NStudy Path is YYour overall Academic Standing is %01% which permits registration. Combined Academic Status is Not Null Combined Academic Status prevents registration Study Path is NYour Academic Standing is %01%. Your Progress Evaluation Standing is %01%.Your Combined Academic Standing is %01% which prevents registration. Combined Academic Status is Not Null Combined Academic Status prevents registration Study Path is YYour overall Academic Standing is %01%. Your overall Progress Evaluation Standing is %01%. Your overall Combined Academic Standing is %01% which prevents registration. Combined Academic Status is Not Null Combined Academic Status does not prevent registration Study Path is NYour Combined Academic Standing is %01% which permits registration. Combined Academic Status is Not Null Combined Academic Status does not prevent registration Study Path is NYour overall Combined Academic Standing is %01% which permits registration. Status Conditions Message /n 225 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration ŁThe student has a study path. ŁThe student™s combined academic status allows registration. ŁThe student™s academic standing allows registration. ŁThe student™s status allows registration. When the study path does not allow registration, the following message is displayed: Academic Standing prohibits registration for Study Path %01%. When the study path combined with the academic standing does not allow registration, the following message is displayed: Combined Academic Standing prohibits registration for Study Path %01%. When the study path enrollment status does not allow registration, the following message is displayed:Study Path Status prohibits registration for Study Path %01%. Hours earned by level The student™s total for institutional and tran sfer earned hours in the SHRTGPA table is displayed for all levels. The hours earned information is not displayed if no earned hours exist for the student. Permit overrides Permit overrides for the term are displayed when they exist. The permit override information is not displayed when no overrides exist for the student. Time tickets Two rules on the Crosswalk Validation Page (GTVSDAX) are used with time ticketing. ŁWhen the WEBMANCONT rule for group WEBREG rule is N, registration uses group time ticketing controls. ŁWhen the WEBRESTTKT rule for group WEBREG is Y, registration is restricted to using time tickets. When time tickets exist, the status is di splayed when it prevents the student from registering at the time the page is opened. Setup is required on the following administrative pages: 1.Add the priority and time slot on the Regi stration Priority Control Page (SFARCTT). 2.Add the time slot to a group on the Registration Group Control Page (SFARCTL). 3.Add the student to the group on the Student Registration Group Query Page (SFIRGRP). /n 226 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Self-Service Registration Please refer to the "Registration" chapter in the Banner Student User Guide for detailed information on setting up and using time ticketing with registration. The following message is displayed for time tickets: This table contains information about regist ration time slots. You may register during the following times. Class codeThe student™s class code calculation includes in-progress courses when that option is checked on the Tern Control Page (SOATERM). CurriculumAll current and active curriculum records are displayed for the LEARNER module and the registration term. The concentrations attached to majors are al ways displayed below the major to which the concentration is attached. The display order entered for concentrations attached to majors will always be the same as the major display or der. Uncheck the display indicator if you do not wish to display concentrations attached to majors. The standard format for curricula display is: ŁPrimary or Secondary label ŁStudy path name ŁLevelŁCollegeŁDegree ŁProgram ŁCampus ŁCatalog Term ŁAdmit Term ŁAdmit Type ŁMajor and Department ŁList all concentrations attached to each major ŁMinors ŁConcentrations attached to the base curriculum ŁOther fields of study /n 227 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Appendix - Extensibility in Registration Appendix - Extensibility in RegistrationExtensibility is one of the key features of Banner 9.x. It uses tools, techniques, documentation, and source code to make Banner easier to tailor for existing and changing business requirements. The following extensibility tools are deliv ered for Banner Stude nt Registration:ŁConfigure Page Components ŁDomain Extension Tool The following administrative pages are delivered with Banner Student Registration: ŁInformation Text Editor Page (GUAINFO) ŁSSN/SIN Alternate ID Search Page (GUIALTI) ŁGeneral Search Page (GUISRCH) - Telephone, Email, Additional ID ŁBlock Registration Control Page (SFABLCK) ŁStudent Block Pre-Assignment Page (SFABLPA) ŁBlock Rule Definition Page (SFABRDF) ŁRegistration Additional Fees Page (SFAEFEE) ŁEnrollment Status Control Page (SFAESTS) ŁRegistration Fees Min/Max Charge Control Page (SFAFMAX) ŁRegistration Minimum Maximum Hours Page (SFAMHRS) ŁPre-Assigned Block Configuration Page (SFAPABC) ŁRegistration Priority Control Page (SFARCTT) ŁStudent Course/Fee Assessment Query Page (SFAREGF) ŁRegistration Query Page (SFAREGQ) ŁRegistration Fee Assessment Refund by Total Rules Page (SFARFND) ŁStudent Registration Group Page (SFARGRP) ŁThird Party Registration Ti me Controls Page (SFARGTC) ŁRegistration Error Messages Page (SFARMSG) ŁRegistration Permit-Overrides Control Page (SFAROVR) ŁCourse Registration Status Page (SFARSTS) /n 228 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Appendix - Extensibility in Registration ŁReserved Seats Waitlist Priority Management Page (SFARWLP) ŁStudent Registration Permit-Override Page (SFASRPO) ŁStudent Course Registration Audit Page (SFASTCA) ŁTime Status Rules Page (SFATMST) ŁStudent Withdrawal Page (SFAWDRL) ŁWaitlist Priority Man agement Page (SFAWLPR) ŁCross List Waitlist Priority Management Page (SFAXWLP) ŁStudent Block Selectio n Inquiry Page (SFIBSEL) ŁStudent Registration Group Query Page (SFIRGRP) ŁStudent Withdrawal Query Page (SFIWDRL) ŁWaitlist Notification Error Query Page (SFIWLNE) ŁWaitlist Notification Query Page (SFIWLNT) ŁRegistration Section Query Page (SFQSECM) ŁRegistration Course Query Page (SFQSECT) ŁNon-Person Search Page (SOACOMP)ŁCurriculum Rules Control Page (SOACTRL) ŁHold Information Page (SOAHOLD) ŁPerson Search Page (SOAIDEN)ŁPerson Search Detail Page (SOAIDNS) ŁOpen Learning Section Default Rules Page (SOAORUL) ŁPersona Rules Page (SOAPERS) ŁExternal API Connection Information Page (SOAREST) ŁStudent Centric Period Term Control Page (SOASCPT) ŁTerm Control Page (SOATERM) ŁWeb Display List Customization Page (SOAWDSP) ŁOverall Page and Field Configuration Page (SOAWSCR) ŁWaitlist Automation Term Control Page (SOAWLTC) ŁAlternate Personal Identificat ion Number Page (SPAAPIN) ŁPersona Validation Page (STVPERS) ŁExternal API Information Validation Page (STVREST) ŁCourse Registration Status Code Validation Page (STVRSTS) /n 229 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Appendix - Extensibility in Registration ŁOverall Configurable Page Field Validation Page (STVWSFD) ŁOverall Configurable Page Validation Page (STVWSPG) Configure Page Components You can use this tool to customize delivered user interface common components and add new common components to the Registration administrative pages. You can hide fields that are not required, change the field type of delivered fields (within the bounds of the database functionality), and change the behavior of fields. For more information, refer to the Banner Extensibility Conf igure Page Components Tool for ZK Pages for Administrative Users 9.0 . Domain Extension Tool You can use this tool to make changes to th e domains without modifying the source code. It is recommended that this t ool is used by experienced de velopers who are familiar with the nomenclatures and concepts used in Banner 9.x development. For more information, refer to the Domain Extension Tool for Developers Handbook 9.0 .Use the following steps to access extensibility tools user documentation on the Ellucian Support Center: 1.Go to the Ellucian Clie nt Support web site: http://www.ellucian.com/Solut ions/Ellucian-Client-Support .2.Click Ellucian Hub to log in to the Ellucian Hub. 3.Choose the Ellucian Down load Center application. orTool VersionAvailability Configure Page Components - Administrative Applications 9.0Embedded Tool VersionAvailability Domain Extension Tool 9.0Using Client Git Repository/n 230 Banner Student Registration Handbook |Appendix - Extensibility in Registration 4.Choose the Ellucian Support Center application. Limitations of page customization Here is a list of Configure Page Components tool known issues. ŁWhen radio group button labels are modified, the information text for each option defaults to Null .ŁThe Insert button disappears when the first colu mn of the Listbox is hidden using the Configure Page Components tool. ŁThe width attribute of a text box in the tool should be disabled until the Multiline checkbox is selected, and the number of lines is greater than or equal to 1.ŁWhen you press the Alt+U shortcut key mu ltiple times, multiple Configure Page Components tool windows are opened. ŁIn Data Masking, the component in the Listbox is never marked as masked.ŁWhen the Multiline box is converted to a Text Box, it always reverts back to a Multiline box. ŁWhen you click the Close button in the Configure Page Components tool, the warning pop-up message does not appear. ŁIn all browsers except Chrome, for the Arabic locale (Right To Left) in the tool, when you select the Item section, the arrow disappears for all records when expanded for one record. ŁWhen you press the Escape button, the Configure Page Components tool does not close.ŁA warning message appears when you click on the Cancel button, even when there has been no change in the Configure Page Components tool. ŁThe F9 key does not work for the newly added Lookup fields. ŁWhen you click on the Revert All button, the Added as field does not revert back to the text Baseline , until the page is reloaded. ŁChanges are not reflected in the Configure Page Components tool until it is reloaded. ŁThe spinner number cannot save a Null value in the Configure Page Components tool. ŁYou cannot make the Read Only fields editable using the C onfigure Page Components tool./n

Banner_Student_Registration_Handbook_9.3.pdf (895.3 KB)
Helpful?

Related Articles: